JP2020028362A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To achieve control considering a degree of advantage of a display result of variable display.SOLUTION: During execution of variable display that is variable display of one identification information from among the first identification information and second identification information and corresponds to a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot pattern), a display result of variable display of one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, variation display is executed continuously) on the basis of derivation and display of a special display result (for example, a small win jackpot) in variation display of the other identification information. During execution of variation display that is variation display of one identification information and corresponds to a second specific display result (for example, a normal big win pattern), variation display of the one identification information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) (for example, it is forcibly stopped at the losing pattern) on the basis of derivation and display of the special display result in variation display of the other identification information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launch device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one that is configured. Further, variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value is provided. (A so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value means paying out a prize ball, giving a score, or giving a prize in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in a state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a hit ball, That is, a right to be in an advantageous state is generated, or a condition for paying out a prize ball is easily satisfied.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on a game ball winning the starting winning opening. In this case, a "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, and can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that when the variable display of one variable display game is stopped in the small hit result mode, the variable display of the other variable display game is forcibly disconnected and the game is ended uniformly in the result mode. Have been. Further, it is described that when the variable display of one variable display game is stopped in the small hit result mode, the other variable display game is uniformly stopped.

JP-A-2017-148127 (paragraphs 0899 to 0901) (paragraph 0460, FIG. 42)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, with respect to the variable display stop control when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, the display of the variable display is performed. Control that considers the degree of advantage of the result could not be realized.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of a variable display result.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, Special state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state when the winning symbol is derived and displayed. The specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). The display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, is controlled to be in a stable change state after the end of the big hit game), and is variably displayed. Executing means for variably displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable identification corresponding to the first specific display result; On the basis of the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the information, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)). In step 061IWS1128A and S1128B, when Y is not set, the process does not shift to step 061IWS1129A and S1129B, so that the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed. (Continuously executed), while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the other identification information is displayed. The variable display of the one identification information is displayed in a predetermined manner based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display. The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes the steps 061IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B when the result is N (step 061IWS1128A, S1128B). In this manner, a non-designated symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the non-designated symbol). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory control process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing a production mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a production mode of a setting suggestion effect. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set at power-on. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning prize ball device in the characteristic part 061IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during opening of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to change a game state. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is an explanatory view for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in a first modification. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 1. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification Example 1. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a first special symbol variation process in a modification 2. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a second special symbol variation process in Modification Example 2. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 2. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 3. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification Example 3. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in Modification 4. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 4. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the second embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every setting value in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern of the special symbol and the decoration symbol in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern of the special symbol and the decoration symbol in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern of the special symbol and the decoration symbol in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning prize ball apparatus 7 in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd variation pattern setting process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transition method of the game state in 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed indicator 26 for urging a right-handed operation of performing a firing operation aiming at the right of the game area. I have. The right-handed indicator 26 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is controlled to be turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended is provided. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and a second hold display for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure An area 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-turn notification LED 37 for prompting a right-turn operation is provided. Note that the right-turned notification LED 37 is controlled to be turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start port switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area do not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Have been. As described above, the row 19 of nails for preventing the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the operation of firing the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). Only when the player has operated the game ball, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning port.

  Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the gaming balls are configured to be able to win in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails. It is not limited. For example, the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left hit operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be provided. A mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area and a row of nails 19 may also be provided so that a game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when a left hit operation is performed.

  On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

  Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves a plate-shaped bottom member formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which a game ball flows down in a front-rear direction to move back and forth. An open state (also called an open state) in which game balls can be won at a large winning opening located below the member, and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the big hit game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved rearward from the closed state where it is moved forward toward the rear, and opening control is performed to open the large winning opening which is a winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port. As shown in the figure, a special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side, and a variable prize ball device 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and move the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, a special winning port or a second starting winning port located below the bottom member is opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can be won, and a closed state in which game balls cannot be won (in both closed and closed states). To say). The special variable prize ball device 17 removes the bottom member in the small hitting game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state, which has been moved forward, the bottom member is moved backward, and the opening control for opening the special winning opening, which is a winning area, is executed. Also, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the symbol hits the normal symbol display 20 and is displayed and derived, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the bottom member is moved backward. Opening control for opening the second start winning opening, which is a winning area, is executed.

  In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from upper left to lower right, so that the game balls dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable prize ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable prize ball device 6B thereunder.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from upper right to lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the special variable prize ball device 7 can be placed on the variable prize ball device 6B without winning. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning ball is dropped. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls as it is toward the out opening.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulating pieces for reducing the flowing speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. I have. In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow to flow is delayed more than when there is no regulating piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side and the variable prize ball device 6B is disposed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from upper right to lower left, and when the bottom member is not receded and is in a closed state, the special variable winning ball device is changed from the variable winning ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable prize ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable prize ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense because the game ball is configured to flow toward the 17th. It can be said that.

  A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the large winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the gaming ball into the special winning opening and obtain a prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  In the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, although the number of prize balls is smaller than when the gaming ball wins in the special winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) another prize port, such as the first start prize port 1 or the second start prize port. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special prize port is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game sphere to the special prize port and obtain the prize ball, so that the player cannot obtain the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  In the second start winning opening, a second starting switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second start winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, and during a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area by a firing operation (a so-called right-hit operation). )I do.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the normal symbols is changed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, and thus the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game state shifts to the big hit game state based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the passing gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of the normal starting area and the operating area.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect frame LED 9 is provided around the gaming area. .

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (a so-called left-hand operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When a player performs a left-hand operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game ball enters a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol display is performed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the first special figure game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on a big hit type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit”. . If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained. Note that, even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be "small hit".

  After the display result in the first special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is defined as a timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, and a timing when the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (a normal state, a probable change state (high probability state), a KT state, a high base state, etc.) are prepared. The big hit type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  After the big hitting game state ends, the state may be controlled to a certain change state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  In the KT state, KT control is performed, which is more likely to cause a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, so that less prize balls can be obtained than in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the high base state, a control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure change time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is executed (hour saving state), and the general figure game is described as "per-figure hit". For example, by increasing the probability that the game ball becomes higher than the normal state, a control (high opening control, high base control) that allows the game ball to easily enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly, the second special symbol) is improved, and thus is an advantageous state for the player.

  The probable change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. I do. A condition in which the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games is an end condition is also referred to as a frequency cut (such as a frequency cut probability change).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probable change state, a KT state, a high base state, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when a predetermined reset process is not performed after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). It is in a state where it is done.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the certain state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (right-hand operation) aiming to the right of the game area. When the player performs a right-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol display device 20 starts the ordinary figure game. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the second special game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the big hit type described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit”, If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the second special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special map game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to excite the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the point of the frame LED 9 is performed. It may be performed by, for example, turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described later. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By executing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, various tables and the like referred to when making various determinations to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 includes various switches (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B)) for game ball detection, and count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (For example, a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on), and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory and a door for a special winning opening door. The signal is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-turn notification LED 37. The LED is supplied to the substrate 13, and an LED signal (a signal for designating the ON / OFF state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The LED control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The LED control board 14 drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right strike notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on / off of the LED.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, control of turning on / off the LED (supply of a sound designation signal, LED signal, and the like), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, so that the execution of the first special symbol game and management of suspension are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes a second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, the execution of the second special figure game and management of suspension are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

  Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process at each timer interrupt, control of a big hit game state, a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like are realized (details will be described later).

  Subsequent to the accessory control process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the game machine to be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also performed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to also output a test signal (right-handed test signal) capable of specifying that it is a period for performing a right-handed operation. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right strike test signal during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

  In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning in the first start winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a winning start occurs in the first winning opening, a random number for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in a first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. Is done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first number of stored memories, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize, the first number of stored memories, and a determination result such as a pre-reading determination to the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  After executing the first start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special map process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is determined based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In the first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are determined by using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. A process for determining one of them is included. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The first special symbol change process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and a measurement of an elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol change processing ends. I do.

  In the present example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) and the first special symbol is changed. When the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the small special fluctuating display may be controlled to be a small hitting game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hitting game is being performed (specifically, the value of the second special map process flag is before the small hitting release). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the processing from the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hitting game is being performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being performed. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. It is controlled to be. In addition, not limited to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the change display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

  Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol are changed. If the difference is large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stoppage of the swinging of the decorative design, and the effect gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than the KT state (the first KT state and the second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the normal state.

  Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is performed, so that the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. May be configured. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and an effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, in the first KT state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, whereas in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds.

  Furthermore, the length of the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the game state, as in the small hit ending period.

  The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In the first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the change of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. The processing for setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", a setting process for starting a big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, a process for starting a small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

  The processing executed in the second special symbol processing (step S25B) is the same as the processing executed in the first special symbol processing (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored as the hold information in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102.

  In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change process to change the change of the second special symbol. During display, a small hit may occur in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the small hit game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is being performed (specifically, the value of the first special map process flag is set before the small hit is released). It is determined whether the value is equivalent to the processing from the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hitting game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the second special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being played. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to be. Not only in such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

  Note that the small hit control based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol may be configured so that the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period varies depending on the game state.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The accessory control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “0”. In this accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, the processing for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “1”.

  The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “2”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. The processing during opening of the big hit is performed based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the measured elapsed time. The processing includes determining whether it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". Then, the processing during opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”. The value of the flag is updated to “5”. When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “7”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “8”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative luminous body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a driving of the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 in FIG. 7 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether a command for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11 or the like. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. And driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It also has a display function. Note that a display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 captures various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, and the like. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main board 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when the main board 11 is visually recognized refers to a back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when viewing the scene, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) has a winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio after the installation in the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  The power supply board is sealed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency. On the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, set values such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later are changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch for the setting and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade determines whether a predetermined number of boards such as the main board 11, the production control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By disposing the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk having the predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among game store clerks. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation using a predetermined key. The locking switch 21TM051 is capable of performing the switching operation and performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even when no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in an OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and a decoration. An LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the application LED is included.

  FIG. 9B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and has at least a RAM built-in. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having the payout control CPU 21TM371, RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. 21TM370 is capable of recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a separately.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball-out switch 21TM187 indicates a ball-out state or the detection signal from the full-state switch 21TM048 indicates a full-state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level to the firing board 21TM090 to stop the ball firing from the hitting ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 by serial communication. In this embodiment, a connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is established between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the signal transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the prize ball request signal to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with the device. For example, when a prize occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to a game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. When a predetermined error (error such as lending a ball, filling up the tank, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is performed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9B.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9C.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indication lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indication lamp, and a card insertion slot. To the interface board (relay board) 21TM066, a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected.

  From the interface board 21TM066, to the card unit 21TM050, a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are supplied to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9B.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a power supply line of 24V AC to the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a winning rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9E, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. Note that “probability” shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F. Provided separately, the jackpot determination is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

  The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4) indicates that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and FIG. When the determination is made in the “rain” mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

  When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is executed at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high ratio (for example, 50%), and It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) is executed at the ratio (for example, 30%) of (3). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low rate (for example, 20%), It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) is executed at the ratio (for example, 30%) of (3).

  In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is performed, and The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the “sunny” mode. You expect to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values as set values stored in the set value storage area, and six levels of set values having different big hit probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like correspond to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is set in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is assumed to be stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the setting value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode shifts to a setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM4040).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is to be executed. When the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be executed. It indicates that it was done. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

  The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power recovery is 0 (the initial value is not set). The notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described later, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. If the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control has been output (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070), the flow shifts to the processing in step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not interrupted during the setting change ( The setting values are changed and / or changed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070). Alternatively, confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode The process shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to set the state in which the change of the set value is not permitted but the set value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (2) 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). Further, in addition to the conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is determined to be ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value is changed, as described later, the state can be changed to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or there is some irregularity. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

  In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although the control is possible, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is open, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the flow shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. If it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the mode is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and a step S21TM4760 described later is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. In checking the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the set value storage area does not store a regular value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 Then, the process shifts to step S21TM4120. When the setting change flag is checked (step S21TM4030) and it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if normal values (0 to 5) are stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, control goes to a step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Mode. Also, if the data in the backup RAM area is checked (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). If the setting change mode has been controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM4140).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes in and after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. In the closed state, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned on in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not turned on in step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 determines that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing in and after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. Setting value error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  When receiving the setting value error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message that “the setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when turning on the power again (when turning on the power switch 21TM055). To perform an operation for changing the set value (determining the set value). For example, a message is displayed that states "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off and shift to the setting change mode." Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until power is turned off.

  In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), and then displays the character “E” on the display monitor 21TM029, so that the “set value is not a regular value (0 to 5)”. It is determined that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that is, all of the determinations in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are determined to be YES) and the transition to the setting change mode has not been established despite the possibility of the possibility ". A notification is issued (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from an output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided for the gaming machines, a call lamp device, or the like). Is done.

  During the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. The provision of the weight of 4 ms prevents excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. During the loop processing, the security signal is continuously output. By outputting the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer or the like, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal. ), It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode).

  The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be performed in this state. Before proceeding to a normal game process (for example, a game control timer interrupt process including a prize ball process and a special symbol process process), it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the CPU 103 can change the set value ( (Setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if the determination in any of Steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 is NO, the processing shifts to the above-described loop processing (Steps S21TM4200 to Step S21TM4220).

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. No. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to urge the user to turn off the power.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting change is not permitted, but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode). (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the control is not controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), The game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 checks whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the flow shifts to step S21TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores the regular value in the set value storage area as “0” having the lowest big hit probability. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

  Next, after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530), the CPU 103 executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power outage or the like has been input. Immediately before the operation becomes impossible due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off processing, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

  Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repetition processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the repetition processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed), If a power failure occurs, the data is properly checked in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (Step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Usually, the clerk of the amusement arcade recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as it is, the clerk of the amusement arcade actually May be incorrectly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the mode has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the flow shifts to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility that the setting is present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area storing the value of the setting change flag is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power on.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Each time a game clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on and when the last power is turned off) is 3 If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 is accordingly updated. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM4620) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determined YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determined NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is kept 0).

  In addition, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and the updating of the setting value (step S21TM4620) can be executed. This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined based on the determination that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing in step S21TM4540 and thereafter is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

  In step S21TM4680, if lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process proceeds to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or whether the setting confirmation mode has ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are performed. In response to the end of any control in the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so as to continuously output the security signal until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed irrespective of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or to the setting confirmation mode (determination of which mode is performed). (Without) a common process. In step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also performed regardless of whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (to determine which mode is controlled). No) is performed as a common process. As described above, the output control of the security signal is simplified by sharing the output start control and the output end control of the security signal when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , It is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the end of the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode and the case where the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode is a security signal. Set to timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode and the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode, the external device side can use any mode. It will be difficult to determine whether or not it has been controlled.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily set in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, reset (overwrite) the security signal timer value of 30,000 ms in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared. I have. That is, after the security signal remaining output period is once set to 1 second, the security signal remaining output period is reset (overwritten) to 30 seconds.

  When the above-described signal output control is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is set to the end of the setting confirmation mode if the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2). 1 sec has elapsed since the start of the setting change mode, and 30 sec has elapsed since the end of the setting change mode when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted. In processing (for example, information output processing), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (this is the case where the RAM is cleared. When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal is continued until. When the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at a timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) May be continued from 0 ms until the output of the security signal is completed, and after the output of the security signal ends, the process may shift to the timer interrupt processing for game control.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec between when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is switched to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between the case where control is performed in the setting confirmation mode and the case where control is performed in the setting change mode, while sharing the output control of the security signal.

  As a result, in the external device, it is also possible to know whether the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been changed to the setting change mode. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the control mode has been set to the setting confirmation mode without performing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process has been performed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

  It should be noted that a security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area of the RAM 102 (however, an area cleared by the initialization processing) based on detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that a security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set at the time of power restoration.

  Here, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, since the RAM clear is not executed, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output processing. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, the output period of the security signal can not be limited to the period until one second elapses from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, if the setting is changed to the setting change mode when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so that the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (the power failure occurs). At this time, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected.) As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (according to the execution of the RAM clear). Period).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. The value of the security signal timer to be set in the period may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the setting change in progress flag is cleared and the power is cut off thereafter, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that, even when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the value specified by the set command (the value stored in the set value storage area) as it is in the image. If the setting value is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), and An effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

  The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the CPU 103 sets the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command, and It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the setting value range specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as it is, or executes an effect indicating the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately notify or suggest the set value. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 to perform an addition process on the set value specified by the received setting command, so that the control load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined that the answer is YES in S21TM4020, the power is not interrupted during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). That is, it is only necessary to execute the process at the time of power-off recovery without RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes the game control timer interrupt processing (special (Including a pattern process). That is, when the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, or when the control in the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 or not. Without executing the clearing, the backup command is transmitted as the command at the time of the power-off recovery, and the process shifts to the normal game process.

  In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power interruption based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply is performed (the RAM is not cleared). That). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 recovers from the power cut based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. (That the RAM is not cleared) can be notified.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the process at the time of power-on with the RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting 30 seconds as a value of the security signal timer and a process of performing a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. After the interruption is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

  As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, saving time flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is set. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared, and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which the tally values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared, and the tally for each of these set values is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

  The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in the RAM clear processing is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. This means that the data has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, whether the value of the set value storage area has been set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or during the setting change mode This is because a normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a flag for performing a process selectively according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag. Initial values are set.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without restoring from the power failure based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply). ). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect such as the game state is initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data when the power supply is stopped). On the basis of the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from the power failure.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer without executing step S21TM4710. ), The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, and the value of the security signal timer is set to one second set in step S21TM4710. Remains.

  By setting the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). Thereafter, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to a normal game process in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a large hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is used to determine an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable prize ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power-off recovery. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. When it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). T), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power-off recovery.

  Further, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). However, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both assumed to be in the closed state (game machine frame). 3 or according to the state of the glass door frame 3a), and may shift to processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, the clerk at the game hall or the like sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize a game state and the like (to execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Can be initialized (that is, the determination in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 is NO and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

  As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting was changed to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value that is to be determined on the game arcade side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process and stops the game (step S21). (S21TM4200 to loop processing of step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and to prevent the power from being turned on when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode has been controlled when a disconnection occurs.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode (step S21TM4030). When all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are not YES), a set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character “E” on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

  In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 10, the character “E” is displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, thereby causing the store clerk at the game arcade to generate an abnormality (to change the setting change mode). (It is possible that a power failure has occurred in a controlled state). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays a message on the image display device 5 that “Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode”, thereby displaying Operation to change the set value by turning off the power once (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turning on the power again (when power switch 21TM055 is turned on). (To confirm the set value).

  In this example, (a) the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is open (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). If YES), the control is switched to the setting change mode. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power off and then on again Please shift to the setting change mode ”).

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 receiving the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “setting change mode is in progress” or a message “change setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on image display device 5. Thus, the store clerk at the game hall can grasp that the setting is changed to the setting change mode. By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is obtained. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the set value to the set value, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled to the setting change mode. . As a result, an error is displayed on the main board 11 (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029), and a message is displayed on the effect control board 12 ("Power is turned on again after power is turned off"). To change to the setting change mode. ").

  In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). And then shift to the setting change mode ”), the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored despite the power interruption during the setting change mode It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk at the game hall grasps that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating such that all of the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the expected set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  As described above, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

  Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied at the time of power restoration (a), an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. The mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being displayed, so that an unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be appropriately changed.

  On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied at the time of power restoration, (b), the power cannot be switched to the setting change mode at the time of power restoration, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. In this state, the game is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. This makes it possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value has not been determined, thereby realizing appropriate game control.

  If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii), a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal depending on whether any of the conditions is not satisfied.

  For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (or the condition for shifting is satisfied). The effect control CPU 120 that has received this command displays a message that the setting value may be abnormal and a message that it is automatically controlled in the setting change mode. It is good to display on the device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command of step S21TM4190 as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated. In response to the operation (change from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch (clear switch) In response to the operation of the 21TM052 (change from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  The effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the absence, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and Can be confirmed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game process, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated, The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the setting is performed, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  The present invention is not limited to this mode. If the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, as shown in FIGS. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the condition is satisfied.

  In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If it has been performed (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The process that is controlled in the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stop state (the process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

  Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is interrupted during the change.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, if the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. The state is controlled, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the three conditions (determined NO in step S21TM4570). When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed (YES in step S21TM4030). Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the mode is forcibly controlled to the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is cut off during the control to the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. Is automatically controlled to the setting change mode irrespective of whether or not is established, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

  Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition that (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

  As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (determining YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation, once the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, in order to fix the set value and terminate the setting change mode, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (determined as YES in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set. On the other hand, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. The game is appropriately shifted to the normal game process.

  Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification that prompts the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 may be issued. good. For example, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting change flag is set. For this reason, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to allow the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take a measure for fixing the set value.

(Setting value storage control in case of power failure during setting value change)
Next, the control for storing the set value when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, in the setting change mode, when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is changed.

  First, FIG. 9 shows a control in the case where the power is turned off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode. This will be described using -12 (1).

  As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. In this example, “0” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in the order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  Next, as shown in the order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in the order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the operation of the second setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 performed. Is changed to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  Next, as shown in the order 5, it is assumed that in the setting change mode, the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in the order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  When the power is turned on in the order 6, since the setting change flag is set, even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared) when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 is applied. Even when the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

  As described above, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without terminating the setting change mode), the power supply is restored when the power is restored. In this state, the set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been scheduled may be set. In this case, the clerk of the game arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the set value again. It is sufficient to shift the gaming machine to the normal game processing, so that workability can be improved.

  Next, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

  Orders 1 to 4 are the same as in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in the order 5, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state in the setting change mode, the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  Thereafter, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that an operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In the power-off state, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control of the setting change mode ends. In any case, when the power is restored, the set value changed in accordance with the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is used. , The effective set value (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is controlled in the setting change mode. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation of terminating the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (by overwriting) based on the fact that the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state is performed, and the setting value is determined. May be. In this case, the setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting is changed to the setting change mode upon power-on and the setting change operation is performed (when the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the operation for ending the change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is turned off, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is This means that no change has been made since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is last turned on is continuously held. Accordingly, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on. It becomes a value corresponding to the set value that was set.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately set the set value in the case where the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  In the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode described in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability according to the setting value is provided. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this. Although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to gaming machines (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

  Also, the present invention 21TM discloses the following invention.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. In the case of a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when the setting value is changed or the like. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of the means O1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) in accordance with a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the jackpot determination random number). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value;
A specific signal output unit (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode control; ,
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (the value of the security signal timer) relating to the period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the setting confirmation mode With the end, the security signal is continuously output until one second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until thirty seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
The game machine of means O1,
Initialization means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes a game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting unit can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (If RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465)
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continue to output security signal until 30 seconds elapse)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value both when the control in the setting change mode ends and when the control in the setting confirmation mode ends, so that the setting change When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting process by the setting unit is common and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The period can be set.

The game machine of means O3 is
A game machine of means O1 or means O2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) to end the setting change mode in the setting change mode. The setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode in the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102), which stores the specific information (setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 which executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit a setting value error error command in step S21TM4190 and display a display monitor in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification for prompting an operation for changing a setting value. Please migrate "message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing the set value. The invention according to the means P1 to P4 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of a gaming machine when power supply is stopped when a set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) in accordance with a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the jackpot determination random number). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means P2 is
The game machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch (setting Changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state), and can be controlled to the setting change mode,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the establishment of the setting change condition (when power is turned on, all of the steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are performed). (Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the condition controlled by the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is switched to the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided to appropriately set the setting value. You can prompt a change.

The game machine of the means P3 is
A game machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification and set the game to a stop state (when the power-on condition is not satisfied, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (any one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If the answer is NO in step S21TM4200, the processing shifts to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 which executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
Said specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and to transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit a setting value error error command in step S21TM4190, and display in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification for prompting an operation for changing a setting value. Please migrate "message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. Is to do.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) in accordance with a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the jackpot determination random number). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). When the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting change switch) Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
Note that the game machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150, and A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
The gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, based on a setting change condition being satisfied, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. And the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the end of the setting change mode due to the ON state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If the setting change condition is satisfied, control is performed in the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030). ), Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A game machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 Is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Is executed), that is, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and it is possible to control to the setting change mode. Specific operation (in step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 was turned off) It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 in which the control of the setting change mode ends) based on
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation has been performed Control is performed to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not. The setting change mode is automatically controlled) and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680). Make
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the condition for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting value stored in the setting value storage unit is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off). Exits the configuration change mode based on
The setting value storage unit is configured to change the setting value in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode. The setting value after the setting is continuously stored (the setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored. Will be changed, so even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the set value changed by the change operation will be retained.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since the control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting change mode (clear switch) 21TM052 when the setting change mode is controlled in the setting change mode. Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area), and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area). To set as a valid set value and exit the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means is configured to execute the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is being controlled. The setting value before the setting is stored (even when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the set value before being controlled by the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 061IW)
(First Embodiment)
Next, a first embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW will be described. First, a gaming state in the present feature part 061IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the present characteristic part 061IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the characteristic portion 061IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). Control, low probability and first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and high probability and first KT state (high probability / first KT state). , High probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  In the first KT state of the KT states, as described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and Is very rare (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled so that small hits are likely to occur, and the state is controlled to be in the high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state among the KT states, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the state is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

  The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). More specifically, in the characteristic part 061IW, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of ordinary drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is increased (but will be described later). For this reason, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Note that the configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which the KT state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal figure is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol fluctuates. By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of change to a certain time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

  In the characteristic part 061IW, the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to reach the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning prize ball device 6B, and by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in this characteristic part 061IW, the variable winning prize ball device 6B can be controlled to be opened based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing the passing gate 41. When the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be opened when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required until the variable prize ball is opened. Of game balls can be directly won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the present characteristic unit 061IW. As shown in FIG. 10A, the special variable prize ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 061IW108 formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which a game ball flows down. By moving the bottom member 061IW108 backward and backward from the closed state where it is moved forward and forward, the large winning opening which is a winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

  In the present characteristic part 061IW, as shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball that has won in the special winning opening is further guided to a guidance route 061IW100 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance route 061IW100 is further branched into two routes 061IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guidance route 061IW100 is guided to the left route 061IW102 or the right route 061IW103. When guided to the left route 061IW102, the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 061IW106. When guided to the right path 061IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 061IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 061IW107.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, a V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left-side route 061IW102, and when the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is in an open state, the game guided to the guidance route 061IW100. The ball enters the left route 061IW102 and can enter the V region 061IW104. When the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance route 061IW100 enters the right route 061IW103, and is discharged from the discharge region 061IW105 to the back side of the game region.

  The V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 061IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

  In addition, in the present characteristic part 061IW, when the big hit game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, and after the big hit game ends, on condition that the game ball is detected by the V area switch 061IW106. It is controlled to a probable state.

  Note that the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 061IW106 and the game ball number detected by the discharge area switch 061IW107 during one round matches the game ball number detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 061IW106 and the game ball number detected by the discharge area switch 061IW107 during one round does not match the game ball number detected by the first count switch 23. In such a case, a configuration may be made in which a special winning opening entrance / exit mismatch error is determined and an error is notified. In this case, it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 061IW104 or the discharge region 061IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after that, it may be configured to determine that there is a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10B is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like in the feature unit 061IW. In the characteristic part 061IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), a count switch (first count switch). 23 and the detection signals from the V-area switch 061IW106 and the ejection-area switch 061IW107 in addition to the detection signals from the second count switch 24)), and transmit them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the characteristic part 061IW, the solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory and a door for a special winning opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, the signal is transmitted to the solenoid 061IW109 for the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values "1" to "6". It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in six stages, but may be configured such that the setting can be changed in two to five stages, or the configuration can be changed in seven or more stages.

  First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, in the non-probability state (low-probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “247/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the winning probability of the jackpot in the whole is 10 times greater in the probability-change state (high-probability state) than in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). In the case of the value “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable state (low probability State) or the probable change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. In this way, even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. May be made different for the set values “1” to “6” so that the number of determination values for each set value matches.

  Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, in the non-probability state (low-probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “247/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as large in the probability-change state (high-probability state) as in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). In the case of the value “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable state (low probability State) or the probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. However, in the present example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), the small hit is achieved. The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the second special symbol change display is the small hit when performing the first special symbol change display). More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Thus, even in the case where the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability becomes constant, as shown in FIGS. May be made different for the set values “1” to “6” so that the number of determination values for each set value matches.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the outliers are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 3C and FIG. 10D, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the loss differs according to the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, according to any of the set values “1” to “6”). , The outlier probability is different).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the present example, and may be configured so that, for example, there is a case where the outlier probability is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the outlier). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (highest probability of big hit), the outlier probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outlier may not be included.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured so that, for example, the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is, the determination value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10C), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the small hit determination value is not included. Good.

  In FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10 (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10 (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probable state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of a miss is different, the probability of a large hit in the probable state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability state (low-probability state). It may be reduced and the outlier probabilities may be matched. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values, for example, “1” and “2”, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Thereby, in a gaming machine having substantially less than six settable stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a gaming machine of a type having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is “2R probable big hit”, “6R normal big hit”, “6R normal big hit” based on the random number for hit type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine either “6R probable jackpot” or “10R probable jackpot”.

  As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the characteristic part 061IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as "10R probability variable jackpot" with a probability of 9%, determined as "6R probability variable jackpot" with a probability of 41%, and determined as "6R normal variable jackpot" with a probability of 50%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the characteristic part 061IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined to be "10R probability variable hit" with a probability of 10%, determined to be "6R probability variable hit" with a probability of 50%, and determined to be "2R probability variable hit" with a probability of 40%.

  The “10R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to a 16-bit big hit gaming state, and is shifted to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The “6R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the state is controlled to a two-round big hit game state and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends.

  The “6R normal big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the low probability state after the big hit game state ends.

  In the characteristic part 061IW, when "10R certain variable big hit", "6R certain variable big hit", and "6R normal big hit", a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the big hit game. Until a predetermined number (in this example, 10) of game balls wins, the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state, and a maximum of 10 special winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probable big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game, and the winning is made every round. The number of possible winnings in the winning opening is about two to three.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 061IW, when the big hit game is ended, the game is controlled to one of the first KT state, the second KT state, and the non-KT state according to the gaming state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The manner of transition of the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIGS. 10 to 30).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The small hit type determination table indicates that the type of the small hit is “small hit A”, “small hit B” based on the random number for hit type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol. ”Or“ small hit C ”.

  As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the characteristic part 061IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as “small hit A” with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), in the characteristic part 061IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “small hit B” with a probability of 70% and “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

  In this example, as described later, in the case of “small hit A”, the special winning opening is opened for only a very short 0.2 second during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game is performed. It is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. In the case of the "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-14), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. You can expect the most.

  Further, in this example, in the ordinary symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the CPU 103 of the ordinary symbol is processed. In this example, when the game state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), it is determined that the game state is set to 1/1000 with the probability of 1/1000. , KT state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state, low probability / first KT state), it is determined to be the per-figure with a probability of 999/1000.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 10-7 to FIG. 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decoration symbol used in the characteristic portion 061IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is data of the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and the decoration symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decoration symbol 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, a variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for the non-KT state shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the first variation pattern is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) is set, the state shown in FIG. The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state) is set, the variation pattern for the second special symbol for the non-KT state shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be a loss, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

  In the characteristic part 061IW, even when the non-KT state is in effect, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning game balls to the special winning opening. Would. Therefore, in the characteristic part 061IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. Is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which a small hit is aimed at acquiring a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 061IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small hits per unit time Is higher than the normal state.

  In the characteristic part 061IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is obtained even if a big hit occurs. Is relatively long, such as 5 minutes, to prevent an act of aiming for a prize ball by unreasonably winning a special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, since the digestion of the first hold memory does not need to be longer than in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small hit. I have.

  When executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, when the low probability / first KT state is set, the fluctuation after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is changed. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06 is performed. Is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is out of the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds. It is determined. If the first change of the low probability / first KT state is determined to be a small hit, the second change pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening) which is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. Fluctuation pattern for preparation). In the characteristic part 061IW, as described above, when the state is controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is lengthened to actually increase the special variable prize. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so that it rarely wins. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately formed. If the device 17 is controlled to the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic part 061IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 can be changed before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, it is possible to win a special winning opening. This prevents a situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. When it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

  In addition, if the variation display of the 2nd to 49th variation is performed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is performed, the variation display is performed as illustrated in FIG. At the time of the low probability / first KT and the second to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 is displayed. Determined to be one. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10E, when it is determined that the low probability / the first KT state is out of the 2nd to 49th variation, the second variation pattern of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or a second variation pattern # 08 of a shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second in some cases. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the low probability / first KT state at the 2nd to 49th variation, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. When the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 10 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds, and the change time is even shorter as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 08 and # 11 are where one or more second hold storages are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. When it is determined to be a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

  Also, there is a case in which the change display of the 50th change (ie, the low change / final change in the first KT state) is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is completed. For example, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 14 to # 16 is performed. Is determined.

  In the characteristic portion 061IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, a character display such as “during a chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5, for example. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the probability is low or the 50th variation of the first KT state is a loss or a small hit, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. Is determined as the second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by an end display for performing In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the jackpot is the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. After the end display to be performed, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined resurrection display is determined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having the variation time of 10 seconds is displayed in the characteristic portion 061IW. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the fluctuation of the second special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the big hit of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly released, the forcible release frequently occurs even in the second KT state, and the player loses the small hit. You will not receive any profits. Therefore, in the characteristic part 061IW, the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a short change time, so that the game mode shifts to the big hit game state based on the change of the first special symbol before forcible loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

  In addition, unlike the feature part 061IW, even when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forced out (for example, the first special symbol). When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed. In the case of the gaming machine, the change time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is the case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You will not be able to receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the change time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is set to a long change time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is a sufficient time that the small hit can be generated at least a plurality of times. (For example, one minute).

  When executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, one of the second change patterns # 17 to # 21 is performed. Is determined.

  In addition, similarly to the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), even when it is determined to be out of the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation time is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, even when the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is determined to be a loss, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small change is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, the change pattern (second change pattern # 19) for preparing the second starting winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, when the small fluctuation is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 10G, when the first change of the high probability / first KT state is determined to be a big hit, the second change pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  In addition, if the change display after the second change is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R certain change big hit which triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, the high change shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is performed. The probability / first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation or later of the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28 is performed. Is determined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), similarly to the low-probability / first KT state at the 2nd to 49th fluctuation, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / first KT state after the 2nd fluctuation, There is a case where the second variation pattern # 22 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 23 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of position after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. If the small hit is determined as the second or higher change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 25 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds, and the change time is further shortened to 1 second. The second variation pattern # 26 of the variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a small hit as the second or later variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 23 and # 26 include one or more second hold storages. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. If it is determined to be a big hit after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the state is the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. The selected variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the variation is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 29 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1.5 seconds is determined. Or the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 30 of the normal variation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 of the shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second variation pattern # 33 of the variation may be determined. If it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

  More specifically, when the variation pattern is determined, it depends on which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be displayed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers for determining variation patterns, and which variation pattern is determined. FIG. 10-10 is a diagram for determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for high probability / second KT at the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the characteristic part 061IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display that causes a small hit is performed, , Irrespective of any of the set values “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in the present example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of the 1.5 second shortening variation is selected.

  In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIG. 10-7 to FIG. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 10-8 to FIG. 10-10, a shortening change of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening change of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of the second KT state with a high probability. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, referring to FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable prize ball controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “probability variable jackpot”). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning port door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning port) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  In addition, in the big hit game based on the probability changing big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 061IW109 is driven, and The area opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 061IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes has been detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning prize ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

  When a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 061IW106 within a predetermined validity period, the game state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to open, and the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is turned on. This is a period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10-11 (2), an opening pattern of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the case of being controlled to the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal big hit”) will be described. . As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (the special winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  Also, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first game ball winning the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 061IW109 is driven, and The area opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to be open for an extremely short period (in this example, 0.02 seconds). When a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the predetermined detection validity period is after an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101. This is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 061IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to be in a stable state after the big hit game is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 061IW104 substantially during the predetermined detection validity period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to be in the positive change state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the big hit game based on the probability changing big hit, the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 at a higher rate during the big hit game as compared with the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

  Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 show the opening patterns of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit B. 10-14 show the opening patterns of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit C. FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2). 10 to 14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

  First, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). As shown in FIG. 10-12 (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 normally displays the game ball. The fluctuation display of the symbol is executed, and when it is determined that the symbol is a regular symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20. When it is determined that the symbol is lost, the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20. Is done. In the characteristic part 061IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the elapse of the pre-processing time of 0.1 second, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

  If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined that a small hit is to be made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). In the case of the small hit B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hitting A, Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning prize ball device 6B can be opened. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time 0.2 seconds of the next ordinary symbol, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, is there. Therefore, in the characteristic part 061IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 second is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

  In the characteristic portion 061IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, since the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the symbols are not changed is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed are more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIG. 10-12 (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 The symbol change display is executed, and if it is determined to be a regular symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. If it is determined to be lost, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Is done. In this characteristic part 061IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying a hit symbol or a missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After a lapse of the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

  If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined that a small hit is to be made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit symbol is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). In the case of the small hit B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game sphere can be won in the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short, 0.2 seconds. In the characteristic part 061IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0) is set as an interval period (closed period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened. .2 seconds + the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds). Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. As compared with the first KT state, the game ball can easily enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball can easily win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning prize ball device 17 opens for only a very short period of 0.2 seconds, so that even in the second KT state, it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in a special winning opening, and a prize ball is easily obtained. In this example, this is also called “small hit RUSH”. Is displayed.

  Further, in the present example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning prize ball device 17 (special winning opening) is made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C has been described. It is not limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened during the small hit game. The special variable prize ball device 17 may be opened two to eleven times. Also, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable prize ball device 17 is somewhat short, the special variable prize ball device 17 (special prize opening) is opened by executing the special variable prize ball device 17 for four seconds four times. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are the three types of the small hits A to C has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more small hit types are provided. Is also good.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 061IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 second, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, a game ball is played. The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, the variable prize ball device 6B is in an open state because the game ball is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the variable prize ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to be won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In the characteristic part 061IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). (See step S26). In addition, in the ordinary symbol process process of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is the probable change state (high probability state), and determines whether the game state is the non-KT state, the first KT state, or the second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not to make a regular hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

  In this characteristic part 061IW, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the symbol confirmation time in the first KT state and the second KT state are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the same as the second symbol. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable prize ball device 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and increasing it to 2.6 second in the second KT state has been described. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different by making the fluctuating time and the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the opening process of the second starting winning opening after closing the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the opening process of the second starting winning opening is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Thus, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the above methods, winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

  In the characteristic unit 061IW, as described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating that the state is the high base state. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the variable winning prize ball device 6B is opened. The time is controlled to be shorter.

  For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG. 10-12 (1) to FIG. 10- The variable prize ball device 6B shown in FIG. 14 (1) is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) for long-time opening, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14. The variable winning prize ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled in a second opening pattern (short opening) in which it is opened for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the control may be performed such that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit game state.

  Further, even in the first KT state, when performing the low probability / last change display in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop of the 50 special symbol reduced fluctuation periods in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is long opened when performing left-hitting notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable prize ball device 6B, a flag for shortening and varying the variable display of the special symbol is further used. In such a case, the special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the special flag and the flag for the shortened variation may be separately managed and controlled.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the opening probability of the variable winning ball device 6B is increased in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning prize ball device 6B from winning a prize, and to prevent a right-handing operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In this characteristic part 061IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal prize ball is stopped when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to take a strategy aiming at the timing of stopping the change of the second special symbol. The variable prize ball device 6B does not open until the game ball that has passed through the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 allows the special prize port to win. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 061IW, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is set before the game ball reaches the variable prize ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Is set to be started, so that in the first KT state, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a firing operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 10-15 and FIG. 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of special symbols. This is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a pattern fluctuation pattern. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of the variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5. Control.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be out. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variation big hit. . The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variation big hit. . The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 specifying command (6R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal big hit. . The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variation big hit. . The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specifying command (small hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 6 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In the characteristic unit 061IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command. Therefore, the display result designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since the display result specifying command for the first special symbol can be determined to be the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command, the display result specifying command for the second special symbol can be determined. Although the designation command can be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

  Also, instead of the game control microcomputer 100 transmitting the display result designation command, the variation pattern command is made to correspond to each of 10R probability change big hit / 6R probability change big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R certain change big hit / small hit / out. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has been completed. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has been started.

  The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

  The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. B000 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the start of a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). B001 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the end of the big hit game (big hit end specifying command: ending specifying command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a special winning opening) for designating a display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) for specifying a display after the round during the big hit game (display of an interval between rounds).

  The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (a second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening in a state where the second number of stored memories has not reached four. Note that a command indicating the first number of reserved storages may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second number of retained storages may be transmitted as the second effective start winning designation command. In the example, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

  The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that designates the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol has not been changed and the first hold storage is not stored). Wait demo display designation command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that designates a second customer waiting state (a state in which the second special symbol has not been changed and the second holding storage is not stored). Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

  The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for specifying the currently set value. The set value is set to “XX”. For example, when the set value is set to “1”, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. For example, when the setting value is set to “6”, the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

  The command E2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for specifying the number of consecutive big hits) that specifies the number of consecutive big hits (the number of big hits that occurred during the probability change state). The number of consecutive big hits is set in “XX”. For example, when the third big hit occurs during the probable change state, the command E203 (H) is transmitted as the big hit continuous number designation command.

  When the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and FIG. 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. In addition, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the big hit game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Note that the case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 061 IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved storage number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first reserved storage number is 0, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS 52A).

  If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and (Step 061IWS53A), decrease the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 061IWS54A). That is, in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is converted into the first reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always equal to the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control of transmitting a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the process of step 061IWS55A, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

  The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to the timing shown in this example. For example, the set value command may be transmitted every time the variable display is completed, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. Or it may be configured to do so.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is the low probability / non-KT state, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variable flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is on, the high probability / first KT state is determined. The high-accuracy / first KT background designation command is determined, and the high-accuracy / second KT background designation command is determined when the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off, and the high probability / second KT state is determined. Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process shifts to step 061IWS69A without performing the processes after step 061IWS58A. With this, when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by moving to step 061IWS59A, a start winning is achieved. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been obtained, the hit may be forcibly set to be off.

  Also, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57A, the process of steps 061IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and the random number value (fixed value) of the loss is set as the hit judgment random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of the start winning.

  When the big hit of the second special symbol is not fluctuating, the gaming control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the big hit judgment module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined that a big hit is to be set (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the display of the change of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). . Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is 10R certain variable big hit, 6R certain big hit or 6R normal big hit based on the random number for hit type determination (step 061IWS62A), the big hit type is stored (step 061IWS63A), and step 061IWS69A. Move to.

  If it is determined in step 061IWS60A that it is not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating a small hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step 61). Step 061IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 061IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68A). In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS69A.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (step 061IWS69A). Move to. When the value of the high base counter is not “0”, that is, when the state is the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base counter (step 061IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 061IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 061IWS75A. When the value of the high base counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 061IWS72A) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time-saving flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 061IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS74A). Then, control goes to a step 061IWS75A.

  In the characteristic part 061IW, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of performing the variable display in the high base state is managed because the low probability / high base state at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit. (Low probability / first KT state) and the variable display is executed 50 times, or the fifth big hit occurs during the probable change state (by the big hit upper limit number limiter described later) and the low probability / high This is a case where the display is controlled to the base state (low probability / first KT state) and the variable display is performed 50 times. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, Y is determined in steps 061IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 061IWS72A and S72B. At the same time, the special figure time saving flag is reset in steps 061IWS 73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

  In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing right-handed notification and continuing right-handed state. As a gaming state, although the high base state has been completed, a variation reduction common to the first KT state is achieved. This is a flag for setting the state as the state and the effect background common to the first KT state.

  Then, in step 061IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 061IWS75A is determined.

  In addition, in step 061IWS59A, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made using one of the non-probable change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

(First variation pattern setting processing)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is being controlled. (Step 061 IWS1700A). In this example, by setting the special figure time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol, it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (FIG. 10-7). 10-9), a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variable pattern table shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 061IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 061IWS1702A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1701A and S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is used (step 061 IWS1703A). In this example, the change time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the change pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

  Also, when the variation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 061 IWS 1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. Is started (step 061IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 061IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing (step 061IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change process)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if not yet transmitted, Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 6 designation command) is sent to effect control CPU 120. Then, control for transmission is performed (step 061IWS1121A).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1123A). Step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

  When the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  If the big special symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1126A). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated.

  If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 061IWS1127A). . Note that whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is the 10R certain hit big hit or the 6R certain hit big hit (step 061IWS1128A). Note that whether or not a 10R probability variable hit is a 6R probability variable hit can be determined, for example, by checking the type of the big hit stored in step 061IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 6R probability variable hit, the process is terminated.

  This is either the case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 061IWS1125A) or the case where the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 061IWS1126A). If the first special symbol variation display is not being executed (that is, 6R normal big hit) is being executed (Y in step 061IWS1127A, N in step 061IWS1128A), the CPU 103 sends the first forced symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmitting the finalization designation command is performed (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

  By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125A to S1129A, in the characteristic portion 061IW, the variation display of the second special symbol has a big hit or a small hit during the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example) is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A large hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time with the second special symbol. In this case, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, if the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129A. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

  In the present example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation is a large hit (in this example, a 10R probability variation big hit or a 6R probability variation big hit). If the first special symbol variation display is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 061 IWS1128A). In this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, N is determined in step 061IWS1120A, and the processes of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A are skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Is interrupted and the first special symbol change display is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

  Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit. Even in the case where there is, the first special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (refer to N of step 061 IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being executed, the first fluctuation is also displayed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 061IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the right-hand operation is performed. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on during the low probability / first KT state. However, by executing the processes of steps 061IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B, the 50th variation display is performed. When the process is started, the low probability / first KT state is ended to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A to derive and display the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designating command has been transmitted in step 061 IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the first special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (Step 061IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a big hit start flag indicating that a big hit is started (step 061IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 061IWS2017A).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 061IWS2018A), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the flow shifts to step 061 IWS2027A.

  By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in the present example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a large hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided to the right of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the right hit is performed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The lighting of the display 26 may be started.

  If the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (Step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the flow shifts to step 061 IWS2027A.

  In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the small hitting game. However, as described above, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to be won in the special winning opening. Therefore, in the present example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not turned on, and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

  In the present example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right strike notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the right of the game area. I have. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification for prompting the player to fire the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as the right strike notification can be executed. May be.

  Also, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right strike notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed, and in the state where the game ball has won the first start winning opening, the right strike notification and the launch promotion notification are performed. (In this case, since it is in the gate waiting state, even if the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening, the change display of the first special symbol is not immediately started, but the first holding symbol is stored). May be configured.

  Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a sound output of a small volume or a small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a high volume sound output or Left-handed notification may be performed by a large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above-described configuration, for a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is made in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is low. Alternatively, for a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, the left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt a player who intentionally performs a right-handing operation to return to a left-handing operation from a store clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, a left-handed notification may be made when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, five times) within a predetermined period (for example, one minute), a left-hitting notification is performed. A left-handed notification may be made when a certain number (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

  In this characteristic part 061IW, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the demonstration gate is set to the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol.

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is not (Step 061IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved storage number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second reserved storage number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

  If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and (Step 061IWS53B), reduce the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 061IWS54B). That is, in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is calculated by the second reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are always matched with the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control for transmitting a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 061IWS55B. However, the setting change processing (processing of changing the setting value) when the power is turned on. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). It should be noted that the specific manner of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is made based on the change display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process shifts to step 061IWS69B without performing the processes after step 061IWS58B. Thus, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the large hit of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by moving to step 061IWS59B, any one of the starting prizes can be obtained. May be forcibly determined to be a loss regardless of whether the hit determination random number has been obtained.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57B, the process of steps 061IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) of a loss is set as the hit judgment random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of the start winning.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B), and executes the big hit judgment module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a big hit (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). . Then, it is determined based on the hit type determination random number whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 061IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63B) and step 061IWS69B. Move to.

  If it is determined in step 061IWS60B that no big hit has occurred, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 61). Step 061IWS66B). Also, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 061IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68B). In the present example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, control goes to a step 061IWS69B.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is “0” (step 061IWS69B). If the value is “0”, the process proceeds to step 061IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 061IWS70B). It is determined whether the value has become “0” (step 061IWS71B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 061IWS75B. When the value of the high base counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 061IWS72B) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time-saving flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 061IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 061IWS74B). Then, control goes to a step 061IWS75B.

  Then, in step 061IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbols to be stopped immediately before step 061IWS75B are determined.

  In step 061IWS59B, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made using one of the non-probable change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been described. However, in the second variation pattern setting processing, the CPU 103 first performs the same processing as in step 061 IWS 1700A, and checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the non-variable pattern table shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability change flag and the high base flag are set, As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, one of the variation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is selected. For example, if the probable variable flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (E) is selected. If it is the 50th variation, the second variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Select the special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if both the probable change flag and the high base flag are on (in the high probability / first KT state), if the first change is the first change, the second special symbol change shown in FIG. The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change process)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if not yet transmitted, Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command) is sent to effect control CPU 120. Then, control for transmission is performed (step 061IWS1121B).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1123B). Step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

  If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1125B). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1126B). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated.

  If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a large hit (step 061IWS1127B). . Note that whether or not the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process ends.

  If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 10R certain big hit, a 6R certain big hit, or a 2R certain big hit (step 061IWS1128B). . Whether it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 061IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit, the process is terminated as it is.

  In the present example, the big hit types when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed are only 10R probable big hits, 6R probable big hits, and 2R probable big hits (that is, probable big hits), and in step 061IWS1128B. Since there is no case where it is determined to be N, the second special symbol variation process may be directly terminated without providing the determination process of steps 061IWS1126B to S1128B. It should be noted that the second special symbol may be displayed so as to be a normal big hit at a low rate even when the variable display is executed, and may be configured to be determined to be N in step 061IWS1128B.

  When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in Step 061IWS1125B), the CPU 103 performs control of transmitting the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (Step 061IWS1129B). . In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

  By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125B to S1129B, in the characteristic portion 061IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed. The variable display is forcibly stopped so that a large hit or a small hit occurs simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129B. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

  In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation is a large hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Alternatively, if the display of the change of the second special symbol that is the 2R probability change big hit is being executed, the second special symbol change process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 061IWS1128B). Based on the fact that the symbol change display is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, N is determined in step 061IWS1120B and the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the update of the second variable time timer in step 061IWS1122B is not performed. Therefore, when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the change display of the second special symbol that is a certain change big hit is being executed, the second change time timer is set during the small hit game. Update is interrupted, and a state is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

  Also, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit is performed. Even in the case where there is, the second special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (refer to N of step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the change display of the second special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being performed, the second change during the small hit game is also performed. When the updating of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the updating of the second variation time timer is restarted.

  With the above configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time-saving state), the remaining second holding memory can be consumed, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a variable winning prize ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the prize ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a prize ball device for the second special symbol (to the right of the game area). In a gaming machine which is configured to provide a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends. As described above, a configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, since the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases. However, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed. The frequency of playing is increased, and the occurrence of the change display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state can be suppressed, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent can be further suppressed. Can be.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 061IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stop symbol of the second special symbol (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol determination designation command has been transmitted in step 061 IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, the second special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (Step 061IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a big hit start flag (step 061IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 061IWS2017B).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018B), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided to the right of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). If the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 061IWS2022B).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 061IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 061IWS2024B), and at the same time, Control is performed to transmit a striking start command (step 061IWS2025B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 061IWS2026B). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

  However, in this example, even in the case of a small hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit when in the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 061 IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started repeatedly. The processing for transmitting the right-turn lighting start designation command is not performed.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027B).

(Normal item control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal process (step S120) in the accessory control process process. In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 061IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag has not been set, the process ends.

  If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (Step 061IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening timer (step 061 IWS 2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data corresponding to the big hit type (step 061 IWS 2104), and sets “1” in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Is set (step 061 IWS2105).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 061IWS2106).

(Gate passing waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart illustrating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (Step 061IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input, the CPU 103 resets the probability variable flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (if set). Step 061 IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 061IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2504).

  In the characteristic part 061IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passing waiting process, but the passing gate 41 is played. The game is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Process during big hit opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 061IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is turned on, that is, if a game ball that has won the special winning opening has been detected, the CPU 103 determines the number of winning balls for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 061IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2403).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V-region switch 061IW106 is on (step 061IWS2404). If the V-area switch 061IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V-area 061IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V-area 061IW104. (Step 061IWS2405).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 061IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening by 1 (step 061IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not it is (Step 061IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 061IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 061IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. After stopping, the special winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 061IWS2409). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061 IWS 2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (Step 061IWS2411).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-big hit opening process (step 061IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 and FIG. 10-28 are flowcharts showing the big hit end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 061IWS2200). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 061IWS2202. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the big hit end display timer to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). The value is set (step 061 IWS2201), and the process ends.

  In step 061IWS2202, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 061IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 061IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 061IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 061IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (Step 061IWS2205), sets the probable change flag, and shifts to the probable change state (high probability state) (Step 061IWS2206).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 10R certain jackpot or the 2R certain jackpot (step 061IWS2207). It is possible to determine whether or not it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 061IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 061IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a 10R probability change jackpot or a 2R probability change hit, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS2208). If the probability change flag is not set, the game ball cannot enter the V area 061IW104 and is not controlled to the probability change state, even though it is determined to be the 10R probability change hit or the 2R probability change hit. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous jackpot count counter for counting the number of successive jackpots (the number of jackpots that occurred during the probability change state) (step 061IWS2209). Then, the flow shifts to step 061 IWS2212.

  If the probable change flag has been set, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the continuous big hit counter (step 061IWS2210). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the large hit continuous number counter after addition is 5 (step 061IWS2211). If the value of the continuous hit number counter has not reached 5 (N in step 061 IWS 2211), the flow shifts to step 061 IWS 2212.

  In step 061IWS2212, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 061IWS2212). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2234. In the case of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (high (Probability / second KT state).

  If the value of the continuous hit number counter has reached 5 (Y in step 061 IWS 2211), the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous hit number counter (step 061 IWS 2213). Further, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag (step 061 IWS2214) and forcibly ends the probability change state (high probability state). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2215), and sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 061IWS2216). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2217). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2234.

  By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2210, S2211, S2213 to S2217, in this example, even in the case of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, the number of consecutive big hits (probable change state (high probability / high base state and If the number of occurrences of big hits in both high probability / low base state) reaches 5, the jackpot upper limit limiter forcibly terminates the probable change state (high probability state) and lowers the probability. / High base state (low probability / first KT state).

  If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 061IWS2218). It is to be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not it is the 6R probability-change big hit, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 061IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 061IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS2219). If the probability change flag is not set, the game ball cannot enter the V area 061IW104 even though it is determined to be the 6R probability change big hit, and the state is not controlled to the probability change state. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous big hit counter (Step 061IWS2220). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2223.

  If the probable change flag is set, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the continuous big hit counter (step 061IWS2221). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the successive large hits counter after addition is 5 (step 061IWS2222). If the value of the continuous hit number counter has not reached 5 (N in step 061IWS2222), the flow shifts to step 061IWS2223.

  In step 061IWS2223, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2223), and sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 061IWS2224). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2234. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability change big hit, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  In the case of the 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 061 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variable display. In step 061IWS69A of the first special symbol normal process and step 061IWS69B of the second special symbol normal process, Y is determined, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step 061IWS70A and step 061IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the continuous hit number counter has reached 5 (Y in step 061IWS2222), the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous hit number counter (step 061IWS2225). Further, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS2226) and forcibly ends the probability change state (high probability state). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2227), and sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 061IWS2228). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2229). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2234.

  By executing the processing of step 061 IWS 2221, S 2222, S 2225 to S 2229, in this example, even in the case of the 6R probability change big hit, the number of consecutive big hits (probability change state (high probability / high base state and high probability / low probability) When the number of occurrences of the jackpot in the base state (including both the base states) reaches five, the probability change state (high-probability state) is forcibly terminated by the jackpot upper-limit number limiter, and the low-probability / high-base state (Low probability / first KT state).

  If it is not a 6R probability variable hit (that is, if it is a 6R normal big hit), the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous big hit counter (step 061IWS2230). The CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2231), and sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 061IWS2322). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2233). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2234. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal big hit, the state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  In step 061IWS2234, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command for specifying the number of consecutive big hits to the selection control CPU 120 according to the current value of the continuous number of big hits counter (step 061IWS2234). For example, when the value of the jackpot continuous number counter is 3, control is performed to transmit a jackpot continuous number designation command so as to specify that the jackpot continuous number is 3 (specifically, the jackpot continuous number designation command is specified). Control is performed to transmit a command E203 (H) as a command). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 061IWS2235).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-29 is a flowchart showing the small hit ending process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a small hit end display timer is set (step 061IWS2300). If the small hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 061IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 061 IWS 2301), and the process ends.

  At step 061IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 061IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 061IWS 2303). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 061IWS2303), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 061IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the right-hand display 26 is on (step 061IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 061IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. The control is performed (step 061 IWS2307).

  In the present example, if the change display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 061IWS2023B to S2025B). Reference), and the processing of steps 061IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hitting game.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 061IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic part 061IW will be described. FIG. 10-30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in the characteristic part 061IW. First, in the characteristic portion 061IW, in a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a shooting operation (left hit) of a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the first start winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal large hit mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 10-30, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / The state shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2212). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / high base state (high probability / high base / (1st KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2218 to S2224). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 061IWS2231 to S2233).

  After the transition to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this feature 061IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). For this reason, in the KT state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the second start winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R certain change big hit, or a 6R certain change big hit mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 10-30, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2212). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game ends. / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2218 to S2224). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 061IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 6R probability variation big hit is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that once the high probability / high probability is reached. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%.

  As shown in FIG. 10-30, even if a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the continuous big hits If the number of times (the number of occurrences of the jackpot in the probability change state (including both the high probability / high base state and the high probability / low base state)) reaches five times, the probability is forced to change by the jackpot upper limit number limiter. The state (high-probability state) is terminated, and the state is controlled to the low-probability / high-base state (low-probability / first KT state) (see steps 061IWS2210, S2211, S2213 to S2217, S2221, S2222, S2225 to S2229).

  As shown in FIG. 10-30, if a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2212). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game ends. / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2218 to S2224). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is set, or the low probability / high base state is forcibly set by the big hit upper limit number limiter, the next big hit does not occur and 50 When the variable display is completed, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) as shown in FIG. 10-30 (see steps 061IWS69A to S73A and S69B to S73B).

  As shown in FIG. 10-30, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2212). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 061IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit is 50. % (See FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2218 to S2224). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 10-30, even if a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the continuous big hit If the number of times (the number of occurrences of the jackpot in the probability change state (including both the high probability / high base state and the high probability / low base state)) reaches five times, the probability is forced to change by the jackpot upper limit number limiter. The state (high-probability state) is terminated, and the state is controlled to the low-probability / high-base state (low-probability / first KT state) (see steps 061IWS2210, S2211, S2213 to S2217, S2221, S2222, S2225 to S2229).

  In FIG. 10-30, the case where the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described. A display may be performed. In this case, if a 10R probability changing big hit or a 2R probability changing big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  Also, in FIG. 10-30, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Also, in FIG. 10-30, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Also, in FIG. 10-30, the case where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIGS. 10-31 through 10-33 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 061 IWS 611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step 061 IWS 612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 061 IWS 613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 061 IWS 614), effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in a set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 061). 061IWS615).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 061 IWS 616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 061 IWS 617). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 061 IWS 618).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 061IWS619), effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 061IWS620). ).

  If the received effect control command is any one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (the first symbol confirmation designation command, the second symbol confirmation designation command, the first forced symbol confirmation designation command, the second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 061IWS621) ), Effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol determination designation command (step 061 IWS 622). For example, when a first symbol confirmation designation command is received, a first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. In addition, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 061IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start right-hand display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 061IWS624). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 061IWS625).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 061IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-hand display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 061IWS627). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 061IWS628).

  In this example, by executing the processing of steps 061 IWS 624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 061IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 061IWS630).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 061IWS 631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 061IWS632).

  If the received effect control command is a right-stroke lighting start designation command (step 061IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-strike notification LED 37 (step 061IWS634).

  If the received effect control command is a right-turn lighting end designation command (step 061 IWS 635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right-turn notification LED 37 (step 061 IWS 636).

  If the received effect control command is a low-probability / non-KT background designation command (step 061IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (blue background image) is performed (step 061 IWS638). If set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 061IWS639).

  If the received effect control command is a low-precision / first KT background designation command (step 061IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a low probability / background image according to the first KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (green background image) is performed (step 061 IWS 641). The effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 061IWS642), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state and the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 061 IWS643).

  If the received effect control command is a high-precision / first KT background designation command (step 061IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability / first KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (yellow background image) is performed (step 061 IWS 645). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 061IWS646), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 061IWS647).

  If the received effect control command is a high-precision / second KT background designation command (step 061IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (red background image) is performed (step 061 IWS 649). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 061IWS650), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 061IWS651).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 061IWS652), the effect control CPU 120 counts the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits occur continuously in the second KT state. The value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 (step 061IWS653). Then, the effect control CPU 120 generates the small hit in the second KT state in the second KT state during the continuous small hit based on the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition. If the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 (step 061 IWS 654).

  In this example, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is started when a 10R probable big hit or a 2R probable big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and is displayed other than the 10R probable big hit or the 2R probable big hit. When the big hit occurs (that is, when the second KT state is ended), the display is ended.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 061IWS655). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is equal to or greater than any threshold, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to set the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball count counter on the image display device 5. (Step 061 IWS 656). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after the addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 in the prize at the current big winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value "1000" has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000OVER" as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

  If the received effect control command is the special winning opening winning designation command (step 061IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter (step 061IWS658). Next, based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 determines that Control for updating the middle prize ball number display 1 is performed (step 061IWS659).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values (step 061IWS660). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is equal to or greater than any threshold, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to set the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball count counter on the image display device 5. (Step 061IWS661) to display the small win continuous middle prize ball number display 2 in accordance with. For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1,000 in the current prize winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000OVER" as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

  In this example, the case where the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when a winning in the general winning opening 10 occurs during the consecutive small winnings in the second KT state, a value corresponding to the number of awarding balls for winning in the general winning opening 10 is set to the number of consecutive small winning awards balls. It may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

  If the received effect control command is a command for specifying the number of consecutive big hits (step 061IWS662), the CPU for effect control 120 confirms whether or not the number of consecutive big hits specified by the command for specifying the number of consecutive big hits is 4 (step 061IWS663). ). If the number of consecutive big hits is 4, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute a probable change limiter suggestion notification indicating that the upper limit number (limiter) of the number of consecutive big hits in the image display device 5 is close (step). 061IWS664). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 performs a control to display a character display such as “one more big hit is complete!”.

  Note that the display mode of the probable change limiter suggestion notification is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, a command for specifying the number of consecutive big hits is transmitted so that the upper limit of the number of consecutive big hits becomes 5, and based on the fact that the number of consecutive big hits becomes 5, "Surely changed at this time!" May be configured to be displayed. Further, for example, the display is configured so that the countdown is performed such as “3 more times”, “2 more times”, and “1 more time” as the remaining number of consecutive hits of the jackpot decreases. You may.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, effect control CPU 120 executes processing of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 061IWS665). ). Then, the flow shifts to step 061 IWS 611.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 10-34 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 061IWS811). Whether or not a variation pattern command has been received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 061 IWS 811, it is sufficient to check whether the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

  If the variation pattern command has been received, effect control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 061IWS 812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 061 IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. Can be determined by confirming whether If it is not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, if it is to execute the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 061IWS815).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to perform the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 061IWS814). It should be noted that whether or not to perform the variation display of the second special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. Can be determined by confirming whether Unless the variation display of the second special symbol is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed), the process is terminated. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 061IWS815).

  By executing the processes of steps 061IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic portion 061IW, when the non-KT state is set, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. When the display is in the KT state, the decorative display is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the second special symbol. In other words, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is not the KT state. , The display of the decoration design is not changed.

(Variable display start setting processing)
FIG. 10-35 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS920). Note that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designating the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 061IWS921). Note that whether or not the current fluctuation display is a small hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 6 designation command. Can be determined. If it is a small hit change, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach out-of-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 061IWS922).

  As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, only the small hit A can be obtained, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game is performed. Can hardly be expected to win. For this reason, in the present example, when the change display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit is performed by executing the processing of step 061 IWS 920 to S922, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

  In the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 061IWS920) or in the case of no small hit variation (N in step 061IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 061IWS923). In step 061WS 923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of position), only the out-of-left design or the right-and-left decoration design in which the left-middle-right decorative design does not completely match is displayed. The combination of the matched reach-losing symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are arranged at the symbol “7” among the odd symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R probability big hit), a combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left middle right are arranged in odd numbers other than “7” is determined. When the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability change is a big hit), a combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, symbol “R”) is determined. . When the display result 4 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal big hit), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative symbols are even-numbered symbols is determined. When the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of a small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of step (step 061IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by If it is not a deviation change, the process directly proceeds to step 061IWS928. If it is outlier fluctuation (Y in step 061 IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestive effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggestive effect indicating the currently set value. (Step 061IWS925).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 061IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 061IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 061 IWS 926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is to be continued. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 061IWS927).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. , A process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 061IWS928).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of process data 1 in the process table selected in step 061 IWS 928 as the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 061 IWS 929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 061 IWS 930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  When the execution of the setting value suggestion effect is determined, the decoration is performed by executing the step 061 IWS 930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) according to the process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 061 IWS 928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the loss fluctuation).

  If the execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is determined, the step 061 IWS 930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 061 IWS 928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the change display of the decorative symbol (during the change in the second KT state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 061IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 061 IWS 932).

(Direction processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-36 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process processing. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 061IWS8101), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 061IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 061 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 061 IWS8104). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data which are set next (step 061IWS8105).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 061IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, (1) Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag has been set (step 061 IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 061IWS8110).

  If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 061 IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 061IWS 923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 061IWS8109). Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 061IWS8110).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 061 IWS8106 (that is, if the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, 2) is confirmed (step 061 IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 061IWS8114).

  If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 061 IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 061IWS 923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 061IWS8113). Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 061IWS8114).

  If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 061IWS8108, or if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 061IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decoration symbol variation time timer. It is determined whether or not has timed out (step 061 IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for a standby effect (step 061IWS8116). Then, effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 061IWS8117).

  In this example, as described above, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit, is being executed. During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the change display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a probability change big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game, Then, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decoration symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 061 IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that the updating of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing in steps 061IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and thereafter, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally, the special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. The “stand-by effect” is, for example, an effect in which the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right of the image display device 5 swings or slightly fluctuates to temporarily stop.

  For example, when the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, or the like, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time timer is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed, the variable display of the system small symbol and the fourth symbol is also continuously performed. When the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

(Wait processing per special map)
FIG. 10-37 and FIG. 10-38 are flowcharts showing the special figure waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 061IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 has been set, the flow shifts to step 061IWS9706. In the characteristic part 061IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 061IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the big hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the large hit effect has not yet been performed, so that the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 061IWS9703 is performed. Without executing, the flow shifts to step 061 IWS 9706.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 061 IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the flow shifts to step 061IWS9716. In the characteristic part 061IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 061IWS9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit effect is executed. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it means that the small hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the small hit effect has not been executed yet. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 061IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 061 IWS9716 without executing the process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop the left-middle-right decorative symbol that is being stopped and displayed (losing symbol, big hit symbol). , A small hit symbol) is determined (step 061 IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command and the second forced symbol confirmation designation command are received, and the process of replacing with a shifted symbol is executed in steps 061IWS8109 and S8113, the rendering control CPU 120 determines in step 061IWS9703. Is controlled to confirm display.

  When the big hit symbol is determined and displayed in the process of step 061IWS9703 (Y in step 061IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 061IWS9705).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 061 IWS 9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 061IWS9707).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of jackpot of the jackpot that has occurred this time is 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot (step 061IWS9708). It should be noted that whether the jackpot type is the 10R probability variable hit or the 2R probability variable hit is determined by, for example, confirming whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 5 designation command. it can. If it is a 10R probability change jackpot or a 2R probability change hit, the process directly proceeds to step 061 IWS9710.

  If neither the 10R-probable jackpot nor the 2R-probable jackpot, the second KT state is ended after the current big hit game ends if the second KT state is in progress. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits occurring during the second KT state and the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter to zero ( Step 061 IWS 9709).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 061IWS9710). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 061IWS9711), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) In accordance with the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 061IWS9712).

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit effect process (step S176) (step 061IWS9713).

  If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 061IWS9703 (N in step 061IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the process of step 061IWS9703 (Y in step 061IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 061 IWS9715).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 061 IWS9716). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 061IWS9717).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 061IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the value of the updated small hit continuous number counter. Then, control is performed to update the small hit continuous number display 1 (step 061 IWS9719).

  In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 is started when a 10R certain variable big hit or a 2R certain variable big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 10R certain variable big hit or the 2R certain variable big hit is displayed. The display is terminated when the occurrence has occurred (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after the addition is any threshold value (step 061IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the addition is any of the thresholds, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the small hit continuous number corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter on the image display device 5. The control for displaying the display 2 is performed (step 061 IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 in the current small hit occurrence, and the threshold “10” is reached. It is determined that the number of small hits has been reached, and the small hit continuous number display 2 indicating that the number of small hits has reached 10 times is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "10COMBO" is displayed as the small hit continuous number display 2.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit medium-duration effect (step 061IWS9722). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 061 IWS 9723), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) In accordance with the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 061IWS9724).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the small hit effect process (step S174) (step 061IWS9725).

  If the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 061 IWS 9703 (that is, if a missing symbol is displayed) (N in step 061 IWS 9704 and N in step 061 IWS 9714), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 061IWS9726).

  Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed. FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is changed to a large change (in this example, 10R certain change). In the case of a big hit change that is a big hit or a 6R probability change big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (A), the change display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120) again, and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120A, Step 061 See IWS1128A Y).

  On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-39 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (see N of Step 061IWS1128A, Step 061IWS1129A).

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120) again, and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120A, Step 061 IWS1127A N).

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is changed to a large change (10R certain change in this example). In the case of a big hit change such as a big hit, a 6R positive change big hit, or a 2R positive change big hit), as shown in FIG. 10-39 (D), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120B, Step 061 IWS1128B Y).

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (E), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120B, Step N61IWS1127B N).

  Further, in this example, the case where the normal special hit does not occur when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode and the case where the normal special hit occurs at a low rate You may comprise so that there may be. In this case, for example, in the same manner as in FIG. 10-39 (B), if the change display of the second special symbol is a big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, the small hit symbol is displayed in the change display of the first special symbol. May be configured so that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when is stopped.

  The control method in a case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a modified example of the control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being performed.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart illustrating the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-40, the processes of steps 061IWS1120A to S1127A are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in Modification 1, the determination process of step 061IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. .

  In the first modification, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129A as it is and transmits the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 061 IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-40, the process of step 061IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

  FIG. 10-41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the first modification. In FIG. 10-41, the processing of steps 061IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 061IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. .

  In the first modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129B as it is and transmits the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 061 IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-41, the process of step 061IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

  FIG. 10-42 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol in the first modification.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that becomes a probable variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the first special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missing symbol. Stop display is performed (N in step 061IWS1127A, see step 061IWS1129A).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120) again, and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120A, Step 061 IWS1127A N).

  If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the second special symbol a big hit variation that results in a probable variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the second special symbol is also forcibly changed to a lost symbol. Stop display is performed (N in step 061IWS1127B, see step 061IWS1129B).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120B, Step N61IWS1127B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-43 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 10-43, the processes of steps 061IWS1120A to S1126A are the same as those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in Modification 2, the processes of steps 061IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the process of Step 061IWS1127C.

  In the second modification, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control of transmitting a first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-43, the process of step 061IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

  FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second modification. In FIG. 10-44, the processing of steps 061IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in Modification 2, the processing of steps 061IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the process of Step 061IWS1127D.

  In the second modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-44, the process of step 061IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

  FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol in the second modification.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that becomes a probable variable big hit? Irrespective of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), the change display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120) again, and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120A, Step 061: Refer to Y of IWS1127C).

  On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the undesignated symbol (see N of Step 061IWS1127C and Step 061IWS1129A).

  If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the second special symbol a big hit variation that results in a probable variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (C), the change display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 061IWS1120B, Step Y61IWS1127D Y).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (see N of Step 061IWS1127D, Step 061IWS1129B).

  In addition, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of the one special symbol is being executed, for example, in addition to the method shown in the first and second modifications, for example, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the forcible release is stopped, while the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be configured to be continued.

  Also, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes the 10R probability variable hit, the forcible stop is stopped, while the 2R probability variation hit becomes the second special symbol. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

  Also, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is lost, It may be configured to stop the forcible disconnection regardless of the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation. With such a configuration, in this example, if the variable display is completed 50 times in the low probability / high base state, the display shifts to the low probability / low base state (see FIG. 10-30). When the variable display ends and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state, if there are 1 to 4 second hold memories, and if there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit, a forced off stop is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in the present example, by performing a right-hand operation in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the second starting winning opening that is easy to start winning is provided. It is also possible to perform a capture method in which the first special winning symbol is changed to the first special winning symbol and the first special symbol is changed while the first special symbol is changed and the second special symbol is changed and the second special symbol is changed and displayed. It is effective as a preventive measure of the method.

  As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being performed.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic portion 061IW, the control for forcibly displaying the missing symbol is performed by the same control in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Although the case (see FIGS. 10 to 39) has been described, different control may be performed. FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the third modification. In the third modification, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-46, the processing of steps 061IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in Modification 3, the determination processing of steps 061IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in Step 061IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

  FIG. 10-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the third modification.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-47 (A) and (C), in the third modification, during the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation large hit, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-39 (A) and (C). As shown in FIGS. 10-47 (D) and (E), the small hit symbol stops in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit. When displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-39 (D) and (E).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B), in the third modification, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a big hit. In FIG. 10, as in the case of FIG. 10-39 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10-47, in the third modification, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly performed with the missing symbol between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. The control for stop display is different.

  In the third modification, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the forcible stop is performed while the normal large hit is stopped. In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is continued, but only in such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a large hit, the variation display is continued, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured so as to forcibly stop. For example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether the jackpot is a large jackpot or a normal jackpot), the forced off is performed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol change display during the execution of the change display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether the jackpot is a big hit or a normal big hit) The display may be configured to be continued. In such a manner, the control for forcibly stopping the stop may be different between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the fourth modification. 10-48, the processing of steps 061IWS1120A to S1128A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

  In the modified example 4, if the variation display of the first special symbol which is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot at step 061IWS1128A (that is, becomes the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag to “0”. It is confirmed whether or not it has been set (step 061IWS1131A). If the probable change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probable change flag is set (that is, if the probable change state is set), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129A). The process of step 061 IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIGS.

  In the fourth modification, the determination process of step 061IWS1131A is executed, and when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, The variation display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the certain variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which usually becomes a big hit, is not in the probable change state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 10-49 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the fourth modification. In FIG. 10-49, the processing of steps 061IWS1120B to S1128B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

  In the modified example 4, if the variation display of the first special symbol which does not become any of the 10R probability change hit, the 6R probability change hit, and the 2R probability change hit is being executed in step 061IWS1128B, is the CPU 103 set the probability change flag? It is confirmed whether or not it is (Step 061IWS1131B). If the probable change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probable change flag is set (that is, if the probable change state is set), the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). The process of Step 061IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

  In the present example, the big hit types when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed are only 10R probable big hits, 6R probable big hits, and 2R probable big hits (that is, probable big hits), and in step 061IWS1128B. Since it is not determined to be N, the second special symbol variation process may be terminated without providing the determination process of steps 061IWS1126B to S1131B. It should be noted that the second special symbol may be displayed so as to be a normal big hit at a low rate even when the variable display is executed, and may be configured to be determined to be N in step 061IWS1128B.

  In the fourth modification, the determination process of step 061IWS1131B is executed, so that the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which usually becomes a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the certain variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that normally becomes a big hit, if the small change symbol is not in the probable change state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In the fourth modification, the case where the control for forcibly stopping the display in the off symbol is performed depending on whether or not the probable change flag is set (whether or not the probable change state is performed) is described. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform control for forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, only when in the high probability / low base state (the high probability flag is on and the high base flag is off), a control for forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol may be performed. Any form may be used as long as it is configured to perform a control for forcibly stopping and displaying in a missing pattern according to the current game state in some form.

  In addition, as described above, in the case where control is performed to forcibly stop and display the pattern in the off symbol only in the high-probability / low-base state, it is possible to prevent a change from one of the identification information from becoming a normal jackpot, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

  As described above, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous to the player. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of (i), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and it is preferable that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to be in a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). In addition, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not displayed). (2) The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed. Further, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a lost symbol). Will be forcibly stopped). Therefore, control in consideration of the advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

  Specifically, in the case where a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information despite the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, if the variable design corresponding to the remaining hold of the one piece of identification information is forcibly uniformly displayed and stopped (forced disconnection) uniformly, even if the variable display is a variable change that will result in a certain big change, it is determined to be a compulsory disconnection. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature part 061IW, while the variable display which becomes a normal big hit (non-probable variable hit) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display for the positive variable big hit is extended by extending the variation (interrupting the measurement of the variation time). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the game value given to the player.

  In this example, as an aspect of “do not stop the variable display of one identification information”, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been interrupted after the small hit game, is restarted. You may. It is only necessary that the variable display is not completely stopped in such a form.

  In addition, according to the characteristic portion 061IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) in a special state is easily provided. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Further, based on the fact that the first specific display result has been derived and displayed, control is performed in a specific state (for example, control is performed after a big hit game based on a probable variable hit is completed), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the state is controlled to the non-specific state (for example, the state is not controlled to the stable state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). In addition, it is possible to control to a specific state based on a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, V area 061IW104) while being controlled to an advantageous state. Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See FIGS. 10-11). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Also, the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the specific state, and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During the execution of the above, the variable display of the one piece of identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other piece of identification information (FIG. 10-48, FIG. 10-). 49). Further, when being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49). ). Therefore, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, the information relating to the variable display of the first identification information can be stored as the temporary storage, the first storage means (for example, the first storage buffer), and the variable display of the second identification information. And second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information on the hold as a hold storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, the state becomes an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, (Small hitting game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result at a high frequency. In addition, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the special display result being derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the hold storage can be smoothly consumed.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 061IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. It is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value for determining to derive and display (for example, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common between the case of being controlled to the non-specific state and the case of being controlled to the specific state (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10). -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

  Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability or the type distribution changes according to the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling property may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic part 061IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display state of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Also, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, the special state includes a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. It can be controlled. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  In addition, according to the characteristic part 061IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic part 061IW, the number of special type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the small hit type is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively changed depending on the set value. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the assignment of the small hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the determination rate of the small hit type may be made different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

  In addition, according to the feature part 061IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability change hit, 6R probability change hit, 6R normal hit, 2R probability change hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the big hit type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of the advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic part 061IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the big hit type is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the assignment of the big hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the determination rate of the jackpot type may be made different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the fluctuation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic portion 061IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the variation pattern is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value becomes excessive. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control changes, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big hit lottery. Although the degree (difference in ball-out performance) greatly differs, which is not preferable, in the present characteristic part 061IW, such a problem does not occur by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value. ing.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, a case is shown in which the assignment of the variation pattern is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the variation pattern depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is varied depending on the set value. You may comprise so that a difference may exist in an advantage according to a value.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 061IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. It is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. Is determined as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. (For example, a determination value for determining a loss). In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs according to the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value, and to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, according to the characteristic portion 061IW, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

  Also, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). This can be performed in parallel with the variable display.) Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 061IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value for determining to derive and display (for example, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game characteristics.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW will be described. In this embodiment, a detailed description of portions having the same configuration and processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 11A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the characteristic part 061IW. In the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, the winning ball device 6A is provided near the center of the gaming area below the image display device 5 as a first starting winning port, but in this example, it is shown in FIG. 11-1. As described above, as the first start winning opening, the winning ball device 061IW6Aa is provided substantially near the center of the game area below the image display device 5, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is provided to the right of the game area. (Accordingly, in the present example, two first start winning ports of the winning ball device 061IW6Aa and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab are provided). The configuration of the winning ball device 061IW6Aa is the same as the configuration of the winning ball device 6A shown in FIG.

  The variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is configured to have the same configuration as the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, the variable winning prize ball device 061IW6Ab is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from upper left to lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the variable prize ball device 061IW6Ab is variable. If the winning ball device 061IW6Ab is in the closed state, it moves on the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab from upper left to lower right, and falls on the special variable winning ball device 7 thereunder. On the other hand, when the variable winning prize ball device 061IW6Ab is in the open state, the game ball that has fallen on the variable prize winning ball device 061IW6Ab enters the variable winning prize ball device 061IW6Ab and can enter the first starting winning opening. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11A, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning port is provided below the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab. The configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same as the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11A, a winning ball device 061IW6B as a second starting winning port is provided on the left of the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, in the present example, a winning ball device 061IW6B is provided as the second starting winning port in place of the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. In this example, when the variable winning prize ball device 061IW6Ab is in the closed state, the game ball falls onto the special variable winning prize ball device 7, and when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is further closed, the special variable winning prize is achieved. The game ball can move on the ball device 7 from the upper right to the lower left, and enter the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning port.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11A, a variable winning prize ball device 061IW17 is provided as a special winning port in place of the special variable prize winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. The variable prize ball device 061IW17 is provided with a bar-shaped member 061IW17a at a lower portion, and when the bar-shaped member 061IW17a moves forward from the back side as viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine, the variable prize ball device 061IW17 is opened. A game ball can be won in the variable winning ball device 061IW17 as a special winning port.

  In this example, when the game state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player is to the left of the game area in order to aim for a prize in the prize ball apparatus 061IW6Aa as the first start winning prize port. A firing operation (left-handed operation) is aimed at. When the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state or the high base state, or when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab or the special variable winning ball device 7 serving as the first starting winning port. In order to aim for a prize in the prize ball device 061IW6B as a second start winning port, a shooting operation (right-hand operation) is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. The right-hitting game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab by the row of nails 061IW19 provided on the right side of the game area, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab and the special variable winning ball device 7 are open. Depending on whether it is in the closed state or not, it is possible to win any one of the variable winning prize ball device 061IW6Ab, the special variable winning prize ball device 7, or the prize ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning port.

  Also in this example, when the variable display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit, the variable winning ball device 061IW17 as a special winning opening is controlled to be in the open state. However, unlike the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, it is rare that a right-handed game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 061IW17, and a game ball rarely wins a special winning opening. Therefore, also in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, it is possible to control the gaming state to the high probability / low base state, the high probability / high base state, and the low probability / high base state. However, this is different from the first embodiment in that it does not have a meaning as a KT state in which a game ball easily wins a special winning opening.

  In the present example, the high probability / low base state is also referred to as a first probable state, and the high probability / high base state is also referred to as a second probable state.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value in the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this example, the large hit probability and the small hit probability are different between the case of performing the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol. Is the same. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), in the non-probable change state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest as the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “247/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the probability-change state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). In the case of the value “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable change state (low probability State) or the probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type determination table in the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of big hit is “6R big hit A”, “6R big hit B”, “6R big hit” based on the random number for hit type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine either “6R jackpot C” or “6R jackpot D”.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in the second embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined to be "6R jackpot A" with a probability of 50% and "6R jackpot B" with a probability of 50%. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in the characteristic part 061IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “6R jackpot C” with a probability of 50%, and “6R jackpot D” with a probability of 50%.

  Further, in the present example, in the ordinary symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determined result, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result is the normal symbol. In this example, when the game state is the low base state (high probability / low base state, low probability / low base state), the control is executed with a probability of 1/1000. It is determined to be a per-drawing, and in the case of a high base state (high probability / high-based state, low-probability / high-based state), it is determined to be a per-drawing with probability of 999/1000.

  Also, in this example, when the gaming state is the low base state (high probability / low base state, low probability / low base state), the variable prize ball device 061IW6Ab is extremely short when the normal figure is reached. Controlled to be open for 1 second. Therefore, in the low-base state (high-probability / low-base state, low-probability / low-base state), it is almost impossible to expect a prize to the variable prize ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting prize port. On the other hand, in the high-base state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state), the variable prize ball device 061IW6Ab is used when 5.5 seconds have passed or the variable prize ball device has reached the normal position. The open state is controlled until ten game balls win the winning ball device 061IW6Ab.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decoration symbol in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 061IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6 is the data of the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, twelve types of first variation patterns #A to #L for the first special symbol and the decoration symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decoration symbol Eleven types #A to #K are used.

  When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first special symbol for the low probability / low base state shown in FIG. The variation pattern table A is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), when the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first change patterns #A to ## F.

  In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, when the high probability / low base state (the first probability variation state) is used, the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) is used. The first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the first change pattern #G To #I.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), each first variation pattern #G is different from the first special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). The fluctuation time specified by #I is extremely long, such as 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed. Is done.

  In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state) is used, the high probability / high base state shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), when the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), the first change pattern #A To #F and one of the first variation patterns #J and #K.

  As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), in the case of the high probability / high base state (second probable change state), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. If the number of one pending storage is 0, the first variation patterns #J and #K are determined to have a variation time of 10 seconds. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first variation patterns #A and #D having a variation time of 5 seconds are determined.

  Further, when the first special symbol change display is executed, when the low probability / high base state is set, the first special symbol change for the low probability / high base state shown in FIG. The pattern table D is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-5 (D), when the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state, in addition to the first change patterns #A to #F. The first variation pattern is determined to be one of #J, #K, and #L.

  As shown in FIG. 11-5 (D), in the case of the low probability / high base state, when the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the first reserved storage number is 0. In the case of, the first variation patterns #J and #K having a variation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first variation patterns #A and #D having a variation time of 5 seconds are determined. As will be described later, the low-probability / high-base state ends when a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are performed. However, when the low-probability / high-base state fluctuation display is performed, the fluctuation time is changed. The first variation pattern #L (special variation pattern), which is 5 seconds, is determined.

  When performing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the second special symbol for the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. The special pattern change pattern table A is selected and the change pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the second change pattern #A To #F and one of the second variation patterns #J and #K.

  As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), in the case of the high probability / low base state (the first probable change state), when the display result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. When the number of 2 pending storages is 0, the second variation patterns #J and #K are determined to have a variation time of 10 seconds. On the other hand, if the second number of reserved storages is 1 or more, the second variation patterns #A and #D having a variation time of 5 seconds are determined.

  Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and when the high probability / low base state (the first probable variation state) is not used, the display for the time other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), when the high-probability / low-base state (first probable change state) is not used and the change display of the second special symbol is executed, the second change patterns #G to #G are used. #I.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), each second variation pattern #G is compared with the second special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). The fluctuation time designated by #I is extremely long, such as 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, in states other than the high probability / low base state (first probability change state) (low probability / low base state, high probability / high base state (second probability change state), and low probability / high base state). When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, a fluctuation display of a long fluctuation of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram for describing an opening pattern of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 according to the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. First, the opening pattern of the special variable prize ball device 7 when controlled to the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A will be described with reference to FIG. 11-7 (1). As shown in FIG. 11-7 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  Also, in the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (1), when the first game ball winning the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 061IW109 is driven, The V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to be open for an extremely short period (in this example, 0.02 seconds). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 11-7 (1), in the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A, the predetermined detection valid period is after a very short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101. , A predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11-7 (2), an opening pattern of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the case of controlling to the big hit game based on the 6R big hits BD will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-7 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  In the big hit game based on the 6R big hits B to D, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (2), when the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 061IW109 is driven. Then, the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to the open state, and the game ball can enter the V-region 061IW104. When a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning prize ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

  When a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 061IW106 within a predetermined validity period, the game state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 11-7 (2), in the big hit game based on the 6R big hits B to D, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to open, and the V-region opening / closing is performed. The period from when the plate 061IW101 is controlled to the closed state again until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 11-7 (2), in the big hit game based on the 6R big hits BD, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 061IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to be in a stable state after the big hit game is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (1), in the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A, the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 061IW104 substantially during the predetermined detection validity period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to be in the positive change state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in the present example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, it is easy to control to the probability variation state with the probability of 6R hitting B with a probability of 50% (see FIG. 11-3 (A)). When the 2 special symbol change display is executed, there is only a case where the 6R big hit C or the 6R big hit D occurs, so that it is easy to be controlled to the probability change state with a probability of 100% (see FIG. 11-3 (B)).

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, a case is shown in which the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to be in the open state in the first round of the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the second round of the big hit game, the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 may be controlled to be in an open state so that a V-win can be achieved, and various modes are conceivable.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. Note that, in the second embodiment, the processing of steps 061IWS50A to S68A is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the first high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol that can be executed in the high base state is “0” ( (Step 061IWS80A) If it is "0", the process proceeds to Step 061IWS89A. When the value of the first high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the first high base number counter ( In step 061IWS81A), it is determined whether or not "0" has been reached (step 061IWS82A). When the value of the first high base number counter has become “0”, the flow shifts to step 061IWS85A.

  If the value of the first high base number counter does not become “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 calculates the total number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. The value of the total high base number counter indicating the number of remaining times is subtracted by “1” (step 061IWS83A), and it is determined whether or not the value has become “0” (step 061IWS84A). When the value of the total high base number counter has become “0”, the flow shifts to step 061IWS85A.

  In step 061IWS85A, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the game is in the high base state (step 061IWS85A), and the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the special symbol change display is being performed. Is reset (step 061IWS86A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS87A). Also, the game control microcomputer 100, if set, includes a first high base flag, a second high base number counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state, and The value of the high base flag is reset (step 061IWS88A). Then, the flow shifts to step 061IWS89A.

  In the second embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of execution of the variable display in the high base state is managed by the low probability / high at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A. When controlled to the base state, and during the probability change state (including both the first probability change state and the second probability change state), the fifteenth big hit occurs (because of the big hit upper limit number limiter described later) and the low probability / In some cases, it was controlled to the high base state. In this example, when the state is controlled to the low probability / high base state, the first special symbol is displayed 50 times, the second special symbol is displayed 70 times, or the first special symbol is displayed 70 times. The low-probability / high-base state is terminated and the normal state (low-probability / low-base) State).

  In this example, if Y is determined in step 061IWS82A, it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol has been performed 50 times, the process proceeds to step 061IWS85A, the low-probability / high-base state is ended, and the normal state (low-probability / Low base state). Further, if Y is determined in step 061IWS84A, it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol have been executed 70 times in total, and the flow shifts to step 061IWS85A to change the low probability / high base state. The process is terminated and shifted to the normal state (low probability / low base state).

  In this example, a case is shown in which the value of the first high base number counter is determined to be “0” in step 061IWS80A. However, the value of the first high base number counter must be “0”. For example, the value of the total high base number counter should not be “0”, so that it may be configured to determine whether or not the value of the total high base number counter is “0” in step 061IWS80A. Further, for example, a configuration may be made in which it is determined whether both values of the first high base number counter and the total high base number counter are “0”.

  Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 061IWS89A is determined.

(First variation pattern setting processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart illustrating the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) according to the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the probable variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the probable change flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, if the low probability / low base state is set), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a change pattern table for determining the change pattern as shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability / low base state shown in (1) is selected (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (that is, if the low probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the change pattern table for determining the change pattern as shown in FIG. ), The first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability / high base state is selected (step 061IWS1713A).

  If the probable change flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a change pattern table for determining the change pattern as shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table B for the high probability / low base state shown in (1) is selected (step 061IWS1715A). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the high probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a change pattern table for determining the change pattern as shown in FIG. Is selected as the first special symbol variation pattern table C for the high probability / high base state shown in FIG.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 converts the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, and S1716A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 11-4 and FIG. 11-5 (step 061IWS1717A).

  Note that, in the second embodiment, the processing of steps 061IWS1704A to S1707A is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  By performing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long fluctuation display is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected, and the variation display of the normal variation time is executed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are flowcharts illustrating the second special symbol normal processing in the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. Note that, in the second embodiment, the processing of steps 061IWS50B to S68B is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the second high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state is “0” ( (Step 061IWS80B) If "0", the flow shifts to step 061IWS89B. When the value of the second high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the second high base number counter ( (Step 061IWS81B), it is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 061IWS82B). When the value of the second high base number counter has become “0”, the flow shifts to step 061IWS85B.

  When the value of the second high base number counter does not become “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the total high base number counter (step 061IWS83B), and determines whether or not it becomes “0”. (Step 061IWS84B). When the value of the total high base number counter has become “0”, the flow shifts to step 061IWS85B.

  In step 061IWS85B, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag (step 061IWS85B) and resets the special figure time saving flag (step 061IWS86B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 061IWS87B). If set, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the values of the first high base flag, the second high base number counter, and the total high base flag (step 061IWS88B). Then, control goes to a step 061IWS89B.

  In this example, if Y is determined in step 061IWS82B, it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol has been performed 70 times, and the process proceeds to step 061IWS85B, where the low-probability / high-base state is terminated and the normal state (low-probability / Low base state). Also, if Y is determined in step 061IWS84B, it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol have been executed 70 times in total, and the flow shifts to step 061IWS85B to change the low probability / high base state. The process is terminated and shifted to the normal state (low probability / low base state).

  In this example, the case where it is determined whether or not the value of the second high base number counter is “0” in step 061IWS80B, but the value of the second high base number counter must be “0”. For example, the value of the total high base number counter should not be “0”, so that it may be configured in step 061IWS80B to determine whether the value of the total high base number counter is “0”. Further, for example, a configuration may be made in which it is determined whether both values of the first high base number counter and the total high base number counter are “0”.

  Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 061IWS89B is determined.

(Second variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-13 is a flowchart illustrating the second variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the probable variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the probable change flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a change pattern table for determining the change pattern as shown in FIG. Then, the second special symbol variation pattern table A for the high probability / low base state shown in (1) is selected (step 061IWS1712B). If the probability change flag has not been set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or if the high base flag has been set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 determines a change pattern. As a variation pattern table, a variation pattern table B for a second special symbol other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 11-6 (B) is selected (step 061IWS1713B).

  Then, the microcomputer 100 for game control, based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the second special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in 11-6 is used (step 061IWS1717B).

  Note that, in the second embodiment, the processing in steps 061IWS1704B to S1707B is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal fluctuation display of the fluctuation time is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B is selected and the long fluctuation display is executed.

(Gate passing waiting process)
FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. In the second embodiment, the process of step 061 IWS2501 is the same as the process shown in the first embodiment. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input in Step 061IWS2501 (Y in Step 061IWS2501), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probable change flag is set (Step 061IWS2510). If the probable change flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a probable change storage flag indicating that the gaming state immediately before the start of the big hit (the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is the probable change state (step 061IWS2511). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the high base flag has been set (step 061IWS2512). If the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a high base storage flag indicating that the gaming state immediately before the start of the big hit (the gaming state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is the high base state (step 061IWS2513). ).

  By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2510 to S2513, in this example, it is recorded that the game state immediately before the start of the big hit (the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is the probable change state or the high base state.

  Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variable flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and resets the values of the first high base number counter, the second high base number counter, and the total high base number counter. 0 is cleared (step 061 IWS2514).

  Steps 061 IWS2503 and S2504 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

(Big hit end processing)
FIGS. 11-15 to 11-17 are flowcharts illustrating the big hit end processing (step S125) in the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. In the second embodiment, the processing of steps 061IWS2200 to S2206 is the same as the processing described in the first embodiment.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot that has been completed this time is the 6R jackpot B (step 061IWS2240). It can be determined whether or not it is the 6R big hit B, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 061IWS 63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 061IWS 63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the 6R big hit B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS2241). If the probability change flag is not set, the game ball cannot enter the V region 061IW104 even though it is determined to be the 6R jackpot B, and is not controlled to the probability change state. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the value of the big hit continuous number counter for counting the number of continuous big hits (how many big hits occurred during the probability change state) (step 061IWS2242). Then, control goes to a step 061IWS2245.

  If the probable change flag is set, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the continuous big hit counter (step 061IWS2243). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the large hit continuous number counter after addition is 15 (step 061IWS2244). If the value of the continuous big hit counter has not reached 15 (N in step 061IWS2244), the flow shifts to step 061IWS2245.

  In step 061IWS2245, the CPU 103 sets a special figure time reduction flag (step 061IWS2245). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2289. In the case of the 6R big hit B, the high base flag is not set, so that if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / low base state (first probability change state). Will be controlled.

  If the value of the continuous hit number counter has reached 15 (Y in step 061IWS2244), the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous hit number counter (step 061IWS2246). Further, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS2247) and forcibly ends the probability change state (high probability state). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 061IWS2248), and sets the special figure time saving flag (step 061IWS2249). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the first high base number counter (step 061IWS2250), sets “70” in the second high base number counter (step 061IWS2251), and sets “70” in the total high base number counter. Is set (step 061 IWS2252). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2289.

  In this example, even in the case of 6R big hit B, the number of consecutive big hits (probable change state (high probability / high base state and high probability / low When the number of occurrences of the jackpot in the base state (including both the base state) reaches 15 times, the probability change state (high probability state) is forcibly terminated by the jackpot upper limit number limiter, and the low probability / high base state Will be controlled.

  If it is not the 6R jackpot B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R jackpot C (step 061IWS2253). It can be determined whether or not it is the 6R big hit C by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step 061IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process and step 061IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the 6R big hit C, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS2254). If the probable change flag is not set, the game ball cannot enter the V area 061IW104 and is not controlled to the probable change state even though it is determined that the 6R jackpot C has been set. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous big hit counter (step 061IWS2255). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2258.

  If the probable change flag is set, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the big hit continuous number counter (step 061IWS2256). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the large hit continuous number counter after addition is 15 (step 061IWS2257). If the value of the continuous big hit counter has not reached 15 (N in Step 061IWS2257), the flow shifts to Step 061IWS2258.

  In Step 061IWS2258, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probable change storage flag is set (Step 061IWS2258). If the probable change storage flag is not set, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2260. If the probable variable storage flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base storage flag is set (step 061IWS2259). If the high base storage flag is not set, the flow shifts to step 061IWS2261.

  If the probability variable storage flag has not been set in step 061IWS2258 (N in step 061IWS2258), or if the high base storage flag has been set in step 061IWS2259 (Y in step 061IWS2259), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to Set and shift to high base state (step 061 IWS2260). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special figure time reduction flag (step 061IWS2261). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2289.

  In this example, if the processing ball of step 061IWS2258 to S2261 is executed, in the case of the 6R big hit C, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the game state immediately before the start of the big hit (big hit) When the game state at the time of the symbol stop display) is the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the state is controlled again to the high probability / low base state (first probability change state). On the other hand, if the gaming state immediately before the start of the big hit (the gaming state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is a gaming state other than the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the high probability / high base state ( (Second probable change state).

  If the value of the continuous hit number counter has reached 15 (Y in step 061IWS2257), the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous hit number counter (step 061IWS2262). Further, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag (step 061 IWS 2263) and forcibly ends the probability change state (high probability state). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2264), and sets the special figure time saving flag (step 061IWS2265). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the first high base number counter (step 061IWS2266), sets “70” in the second high base number counter (step 061IWS2267), and sets “70” in the total high base number counter. Is set (step 061IWS2268). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2289.

  In this example, even in the case of 6R big hit C, the number of continuous big hits (probable change state (high probability / high base state and high probability / low state) even in the case of 6R big hit C by executing the processing of steps 061IWS2256, S2257, S2262 to S2268. When the number of occurrences of the jackpot in the base state (including both the base state) reaches 15 times, the probability change state (high probability state) is forcibly terminated by the jackpot upper limit number limiter, and the low probability / high base state Will be controlled.

  If it is not the 6R jackpot C, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS2269). It can be determined whether or not it is the 6R big hit D, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 061IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 061IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a 6R big hit D, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS2270). If the probability change flag is not set, the game ball cannot enter the V area 061IW104 even though it is determined to be the 6R big hit D, and is not controlled to the probability change state. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous big hit counter (step 061IWS2271). Then, control goes to a step 061 IWS2274.

  If the probable change flag is set, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the continuous big hit counter (step 061IWS2272). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the large hit continuous number counter after addition is 15 (step 061IWS2273). If the value of the continuous big hit counter has not reached 15 (N in step 061IWS2273), the flow shifts to step 061IWS2274.

  In step 061IWS2274, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2274). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special figure time reduction flag (step 061IWS2275). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2289. Therefore, if it is 6R big hit D, the high base flag is set, and if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (second probability changing state). Will be.

  If the value of the continuous hit number counter has reached 15 (Y in step 061IWS2273), the CPU 103 resets the value of the continuous hit number counter (step 061IWS2276). Further, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS2277) and forcibly ends the probability change state (high probability state). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2278), and sets the special figure time saving flag (step 061IWS2279). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the first high base number counter (step 061IWS2280), sets “70” in the second high base number counter (step 061IWS2281), and “70” in the total high base number counter. Is set (step 061 IWS2282). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2289.

  By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2272, S2273, and S2276 to S2282, in this example, even in the case of 6R big hit D, the number of continuous big hits (probable change state (high probability / high base state and high probability / low probability) When the number of occurrences of the jackpot in the base state (including both the base state) reaches 15 times, the probability change state (high probability state) is forcibly terminated by the jackpot upper limit number limiter, and the low probability / high base state Will be controlled.

  If it is not the 6R big hit D (that is, if it is 6R big hit A), the CPU 103 resets the value of the big hit continuous number counter (step 061IWS2283). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 061IWS2284), and sets the special figure time saving flag (step 061IWS2285). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the first high base number counter (step 061IWS2286), sets “70” in the second high base number counter (step 061IWS2287), and sets “70” in the total high base number counter. Is set (step 061IWS2288). Then, the flow shifts to step 061WS2289. Therefore, in the case of 6R big hit A, it is controlled to the low probability / high base state.

  In step 061IWS2289, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command for specifying the number of continuous big hits to the selection control CPU 120 according to the current value of the continuous number of big hits counter (step 061IWS2289). For example, when the value of the jackpot continuous number counter is 3, control is performed to transmit a jackpot continuous number designation command so as to specify that the jackpot continuous number is 3 (specifically, the jackpot continuous number designation command is specified). Control is performed to transmit a command E203 (H) as a command). If set, the CPU 103 resets the probable change storage flag and the high base storage flag (step 061IWS2290). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 061IWS2291).

(Transition of game state)
Next, transition of a game state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a manner of transition of the gaming state according to the second embodiment of the characteristic unit 061IW. In the second embodiment, in the low-probability / low-base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is long. Performed with fluctuations. In addition, since the low base state is set, the probability of hitting the normal drawing is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 061IW6Ab being opened is low. For this reason, in order to cause the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning port to win a game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the left side of the game area to launch the game ball (leftward). Hit). Therefore, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), a start winning is mainly generated in the prize ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when the big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the 6R big hit A or the 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 11-18, when a 6R big hit B occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / The state shifts to the low base state (first probability change state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240 to S2245). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when the 6R big hit A occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs or the predetermined number of fluctuation display is ended. Until then, the low probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 061IWS2283 to S2287).

  When the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (the first probability variation state), the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in a normal variation time, whereas the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in a long variation. You. In addition, since the low base state is set, the probability of hitting the normal drawing is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency of the variable prize ball apparatus 061IW6Ab being opened is low. Therefore, in order to cause the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning port to win the game ball and execute the variation display of the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and fires the game ball (right Hit). Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), a winning start is mainly generated in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state, the 6R big hit C or the 6R big hit D mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 11-18, when the 6R big hit C occurs in the high probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability is returned after the big hit game ends. / Low base state (first probability change state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2261). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 6R big hit D occurs in the high probability / low base state, the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (second probability change state) after the end of the big hit game, and the high probability is maintained until the next big hit occurs. / The high base state (second probable change state) is maintained (see steps 061 IWS2204 to S2206, S2269 to S2275).

  When the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (second probable state), the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal fluctuating time, whereas the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed in a long fluctuation. You. However, since the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the ordinary drawing is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball apparatus 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to allow the variable winning prize ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning port to win a game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area to fire the game ball ( Right). Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probable change state), a start winning prize is mainly generated in the variable winning ball apparatus 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state, the 6R big hit A or the 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 11-18, when a 6R big hit B occurs in the high probability / high base state, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / The state shifts to the low base state (first probability change state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240 to S2245). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. When the 6R big hit A occurs in the high probability / high base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs or the predetermined number of fluctuation display is ended. Until then, the low probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 061IWS2283 to S2287).

  When shifting to the low probability / high base state, the change display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal change time, whereas the change display of the second special symbol is executed in a long change. However, since the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the ordinary drawing is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball apparatus 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to allow the variable winning prize ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning port to win a game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area to fire the game ball ( Right). Therefore, in the low probability / high base state, a start winning is mainly generated in the variable winning ball apparatus 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed. In addition, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state, the 6R big hit A or the 6R big hit B mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 11-18, when a 6R big hit B occurs in the low probability / high base state, if a game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / The state shifts to the low base state (first probability change state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240 to S2245). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. When the 6R big hit A occurs in the low probability / high base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state again after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs or the change display of the predetermined number of times ends. The low probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 061IWS2283 to S2287).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-18, after the transition to the low-probability / high-base state is performed, if the change display of the first special symbol is executed 50 times, the low-probability / high-base state is ended, and the low-probability / high-base state is terminated. The state shifts to the low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS81A, S82A, S85A to S88A, S2250, S2266, S2280, S2286). Also, after the transition to the low-probability / high-base state, the low-probability / high-base state is ended and the low-probability / high-base state (normal state) is also performed when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed 70 times. (Steps 061IWS81B, S82B, S85B to S88B, S2251, S2267, S2281, S2287). Further, even after the transition to the low probability / high base state, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 70 times in total, the low probability / high base state is terminated, The state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061 IWS 83A to S88A, S83B to S88B, S2252, S2268, S2282, S2288).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-18, when 6R jackpots B to D occur in the probability change state (high probability / low base state (first probability change state), high probability / high base state (second probability change state)) Even if the number of consecutive big hits (number of occurrences of big hits in the probabilistic state (including both the high probability / high base state and the high probability / low base state)) reaches 15, the maximum number of big hits The probability change state (high probability state) is forcibly terminated by the limiter, and the state is controlled to the low probability / high base state (steps 061 IWS2243, S2244, S2246 to S2252, S2256, S2257, S2262 to S2268, S2272, S2273, See S2276 to S2282).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-18, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), except for the case of hitting the jackpot upper limit number limiter, the 6R jackpot C becomes the high probability / high probability again. Since it is controlled to the low base state (first probability change state) or 6R big hit D and controlled to the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), even if a big hit occurs, there is a 100% probability. The state changes again. Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), it can be said that at least two more jackpots are guaranteed during the probability change state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), when the 6R big hit B is reached, the probability is controlled to the high probability / low base state and the probability change state continues. The state shifts to the probability / high base state and the probability change state ends. Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probable change state), it can be said that the state (only one loop) in which only one big hit is guaranteed during the probable change state.

  In addition, in this example, although the case where the 6R big hits A to D, which are the big hits of all six rounds, are provided as the big hit type, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the present example, the case where the control is performed to the low probability / high base state when the 6R jackpot A is reached is shown, but even when the control is performed to the same low probability / high base state, the number of rounds May be configured to provide a 4R jackpot A of four rounds of different jackpots or a 10R jackpot A of 10 rounds of jackpots. Similarly, for example, even in the case of being controlled to the same high probability / high base state, a configuration may be adopted in which a 4R jackpot D of 4 rounds and a 10R jackpot D of 10 rounds are provided. Often, various embodiments are conceivable.

  Further, in this example, a case where the state is shifted to the low probability / high base state when the maximum hit limit number limiter is applied is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the fact that a big hit has occurred in the probability change state (high probability / low base state (first probability change state), high probability / high base state (second probability change state)) and the maximum hit limit number limiter has been applied. , A low probability / low base state (normal state). In addition, for example, during the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), a transition to the high probability / high base state (second probability change state) is performed based on the fact that a big hit occurs and the maximum hit limit is applied. May be configured.

  Note that the feature part 061IW can be configured by appropriately combining the configuration described in the first embodiment and the configuration described in the second embodiment. For example, in the first embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) based on the derived and displayed special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) in the variable display of the symbol (FIG. 10-). 39).

  In addition, for example, in the second embodiment, based on the command for specifying the number of continuous big hits transmitted in step 061IWS2289, the same processing as the processing of steps 061IWS662 to S664 shown in the first embodiment is performed, and image display is performed. The device 5 may be configured to execute a probability change limiter suggestion notification indicating that the upper limit number (limiter) of the number of consecutive big hits is close.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the display result of the variable display is advantageous. Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the characteristic unit 061IW has the following gaming machines (means A1) to (means A5). Is also disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103 performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, a variable display result). When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) )), The variable display execution means executes the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information while performing the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, when the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is updated). Is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed) and the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, The second control derived and displayed with the shift symbol (for example, displaying the shift symbol and stopping (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the shift symbol)) And which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, First, the CPU 103) executes the steps 061IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of the steps 061IWS1128A and S1128B. Step 061 IWS1127A and S1127B Therefore, steps 061IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 061IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, a special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a part that executes step 061 IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is different from a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) and is easily controlled to an advantageous state compared to a non-specific state (for example, a high probability state) The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 061 IWS2206) in the microcomputer 100, and the specific state control means controls to the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the state is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability change jackpot). Controlled to a constant state (e.g., after the jackpot gaming based on normal big hit ends not control the probability variation state) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). A specific state which is different from the advantageous state and which can be controlled to a specific state (eg, a high probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (eg, a low probability state). Control means (for example, a part for executing step 061 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the specific state control means controls the specific area (for example, Based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the V area 061IW104), it can be controlled to a specific state (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. The game medium passes through the specific area at a high rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state as compared with (in the big hit game based on the probable big hit as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), the V area opening / closing plate The opening period of the 061-IW101 is long, while the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 may be very short, as shown in FIG. . According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the first specific display result is controlled to be in a positive change state after the end of the big hit game). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high-probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state) Means (for example, a part for executing step 061 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)). When the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the other identification information is being performed. , The variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modified example 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 ) Execute steps 061IWS1129A and S1130A when Y is determined in steps 061IWS1131A and S1131B. See FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49.) When the non-specific state is controlled, the first identification information and the second During execution of the variable display of one of the identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the other identification information is displayed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 061IWS1129A and S1129B when the answer is N in steps 061IWS1131A and S1131B, and may be configured as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the display result of the variable display is advantageous. Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the characteristic unit 061IW has the following (means B1) to (means B5). Is also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103 performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, a variable display result). When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ) In which the variable display execution means executes the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. The special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS64A and S64B; see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed, the special table is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. On the basis of the derived display of the result, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted and the first control is stopped) A second control (for example, a lost symbol) derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) of a variable display of the one of the identification information and a variable display of the one of the identification information is continuously performed. (For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol), and the display is derived in the variable display of one of the identification information. Which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the displayed result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes step 061). Steps 061 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed based on the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B based on the determination results of steps 061IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 061IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In the means B1, special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a part that executes step 061 IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is different from a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) and is easily controlled to an advantageous state compared to a non-specific state (for example, a high probability state) The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 061 IWS2206) in the microcomputer 100, and the specific state control means controls to the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the state is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability change jackpot). Controlled to a constant state (e.g., after the jackpot gaming based on normal big hit ends not control the probability variation state) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of the means B1 to B3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). A specific state which is different from the advantageous state and which can be controlled to a specific state (eg, a high probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (eg, a low probability state). Control means (for example, a part for executing step 061 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the specific state control means controls the specific area (for example, Based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the V area 061IW104), it can be controlled to a specific state (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. The game medium passes through the specific area at a high rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state as compared with (in the big hit game based on the probable big hit as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), the V area opening / closing plate The opening period of the 061-IW101 is long, while the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 may be very short, as shown in FIG. . According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the first specific display result is controlled to be in a positive change state after the end of the big hit game). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high-probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state) Means (for example, a part for executing step 061 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)). When the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the variable display of the other identification information is being performed. , The variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modified example 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 ) Execute steps 061IWS1129A and S1130A when Y is determined in steps 061IWS1131A and S1131B. See FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49.) When the non-specific state is controlled, the first identification information and the second During execution of the variable display of one of the identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the other identification information is displayed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 061IWS1129A and S1129B when the answer is N in steps 061IWS1131A and S1131B, and may be configured as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), it was not possible to sufficiently increase the interest in enabling control to a specific state. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in a case where the control unit can be controlled to a specific state, the characteristic unit 061IW has the following (means C1) to (means C8). The characteristic configuration of the machine is also disclosed.

(Means C1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103 performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, a variable display result). When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ), And specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, A step of executing step 061 IWS2206 in the CPU 103), and controlling to the advantageous state in response to the variable display of the first identification information and to the advantageous state in response to the variable display of the second identification information. Sometimes, the ratio of controlling to the specific state after the end of the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIG. When the special symbol change display is executed, it is easy to be controlled to the probability change state as the 6R big hit B with a probability of 50%, and when the second special symbol change display is executed, the 6R big hit C or Since there is only the case of 6R big hit D, it is easy to be controlled to the probability change state with a probability of 100%.) The specific state control means uses the first specific state as the specific state (high probability / low base state (first probability change state)). And a second specific state (high probability / high base state (second probable state)). When controlled to the first specific state, the variable display of the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. The ratio of variable display in a variable display period shorter than the variable display is low (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines that Y and step 061IW in step 061IWS1710A). When N is determined in S1714A, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected in Step 061IWS1715A, and Step 061IWS1717A is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B). Determining the first variation patterns of long variation #G to #I), the first specific state can be maintained until controlled to an advantageous state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, occurrence of 6R big hit D) The second specific state can be controlled based on the first specific information (see FIGS. 11-18), and when the second specific state is controlled, the variable display of the second identification information is shorter than the variable display of the first identification information. The ratio of the variable display of the display period is low (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines that the Y is at step 061IWS1710B and the Y is at step 061IWS1711B, and that the variation pattern for the second special symbol is at step 061IWS1713B. Table B is selected and step 061IWS1717B is executed, as shown in FIG. The second variation patterns #G to #I are determined), the second specific state can be maintained until the advantageous state is controlled, and based on the specific condition being satisfied (for example, occurrence of the 6R big hit A). It can be controlled to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability / high base state) (see FIGS. 11 to 18), and the variable display execution means changes the second identification information during execution of the variable display of the first identification information. Based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the display, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The CPU 103) executes the steps 061IWS1129A and S1130A when N at step 061IWS1128A to display a lost symbol and stops (for example, Special variable display of symbols is forcibly stopped and displayed in the symbol out)) be characterized. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the case where control to a specific state is possible.

  Also, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probable change state), the change display of the first special symbol is executed in a long change, but during the change display of the first special symbol of the long change. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped and displayed in a design different from the variation display of the first special symbol. It can be digested efficiently.

  In particular, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 11-18, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, and two big hits are originally required. Although the occurrence is guaranteed (two loops), if the irregular display of the first special symbol is executed irregularly, there is a possibility that the 6R big hit A will occur and the probability change state will end. Interest in the game may be significantly reduced. On the other hand, in this example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first variation of the long variation that is irregularly executed, the first special symbol is displayed. The variable display can be forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol, and the situation in which the probable change state ends during the high probability / low base state (the first probable change state) can be eliminated, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be prevented.

  In this example, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is performed with the predetermined display result. Derived and displayed (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the change display of the first special symbol is a big hit change that usually becomes a big hit, the small hit symbol is displayed in the change display of the second special symbol. When the stop symbol is displayed, the change display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol). However, the first identification information and the second identification information are interchanged. May be. For example, even when the change display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be configured such that the normal big hit may occur at a low rate, and the change of the second special symbol is changed in the same manner as in FIG. 10-39 (B). If the display is a big hit change that usually becomes a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped at the missing symbol May be configured.

(Means C2) The means C1 has a starting area (for example, a first winning opening), and an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easy to enter, and difficult or impossible to enter. Variable means (for example, a variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab) that can be changed to a non-easily accessible state (for example, a closed state) and a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the variable means is likely to be in an easy-to-enter state. A predetermined state control unit (for example, a part that executes steps 061IWS2248, S2260, S2264, S2274, S2278, and S2284 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) may be provided. . According to such a configuration, by providing a predetermined state in which the variable means is likely to be in an easy-to-enter state, it is possible to improve interest in a case where control to a specific state is possible.

(Means C3) In the means C2, the predetermined state control means can control the predetermined state at different rates depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-18). If the 6R jackpot D is reached, the state becomes high probability / high base state (second probability change state) and is controlled to the high base state. It may be configured to be in the base state (first probable change state and not controlled to the high base state). According to such a configuration, the ratio of control to the predetermined state differs depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not, so that it is possible to improve interest when control to the specific state is possible.

(Means C4) In the means C2 or the means C3, the predetermined state control means terminates the predetermined state based on a special condition being satisfied (for example, executing a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display) (for example, a game control microcomputer). 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 executes steps 061IWS80A to S88A and S80B to S88B), and the special condition is based on the fact that the variable display is executed a specific number of times (for example, 50 or 70). The specific number of times is different between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. (1) The low-probability / high-base state is terminated based on the execution of the change display of the special symbol 50 times, and the state is shifted to the low-probability / low-base state (normal state). Another symbol variable display the based on the executed 70 times to exit the low probability / high base state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state)) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, the condition for terminating the predetermined state is different between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, so that the specific state can be controlled. In this case, the interest can be improved.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to C4, the specific state control means ends the specific state based on a special condition being satisfied (for example, a jackpot upper limit number limiter). The condition is established based on the number of times that the state is controlled becomes a predetermined number (for example, 15 times) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines Y in steps 061IWS2244, S2257, and S2273. In this case, steps 061IWS2246 to S2252, S2262 to S2268, and S2276 to S2282 are executed). According to such a configuration, by ending the specific state based on the fact that the number of times of controlling to the advantageous state becomes the predetermined number, it is possible to improve the interest when the control to the specific state is possible.

(Means C6) In means C5, effect executing means capable of changing the effect mode in accordance with the remaining number of times until the number of times controlled to the advantageous state reaches the predetermined number (for example, executing steps 061IWS662 to S664 in the effect control CPU 120) May be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the remaining number of times until the number of times controlled to the advantageous state reaches the predetermined number.

(Means C7) In any one of the means C1 to the means C6, the specific state control means may allow a specific area (for example, the V area 061IW104) to be filled with a game medium (for example, a game ball) while being controlled to an advantageous state. Based on the passing, control to a specific state is possible (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061 IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), and the first identification information The ratio at which the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous state is controlled between the time when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display and the time when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information. (As shown in FIG. 11-7 (2), in the big hit game based on the 6R big hits B to D, the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is opened. During long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (1), the jackpot gaming based on 6R jackpot A, opening period of the V region closing plate 061IW101 very short.) May be configured so. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is different between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is performed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is performed, so that the specific state is achieved. Interest in the case where the control can be performed in a short time can be improved.

(Means C8) In any one of the means C1 to C7, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the first specific display result is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game). The variable display execution means is configured to derive and display the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. , The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Step 061I). When N is determined in S1128A, by executing steps 061IWS1129A and S1130A, a lost symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost symbol). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), it was not possible to sufficiently increase the interest in enabling control to a specific state. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in the case where the control unit can be controlled to a specific state, the characteristic unit 061IW has the following (means D1) to (means D7). The characteristic configuration of the machine is also disclosed.

(Means D1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103 performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, a variable display result). When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ), And specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, A special state control means (for example, a game) in which the CPU 103 can perform control in a special state (for example, a high probability / low base state (second KT state)) in which the step 061 IWS 2206 is executed and a special state in which the special state is frequently controlled. Step 061I in the control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) S2204 to S2212), and at least a part of the control period is common to the specific state and the special state (for example, in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the probability change state (high probability state) ), And also in the second KT state), the specific state control means changes from the specific state based on the fact that the special condition regarding the number of times of control of the advantageous state is satisfied (for example, the upper limit of the number of large hits). Control is performed to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability / high base state) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 061IWS2213 to S2217 and S2225 when Y is determined in steps 061IWS2211 and S2222). To S2229). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the case where control to a specific state is possible.

  In particular, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state, the KT state is difficult to continue, and depending on the number of times of performing the variable display in the KT state and the type of the big hit of the generated big hit, the benefit of the KT state can be sufficiently obtained. And the interest in the game may be significantly reduced. On the other hand, in the present example, the game mode shifts to the non-specific state (low probability / high base state) based on the value of the jackpot upper limit counter. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the first specific display result is derived. The display is more advantageous to the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to be in a probable state after the end of the big hit game). The variable display of the first identification information is performed based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to step 061IWS1129A when Y in step 061IWS1128A). As a result, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the first identification information and the second specific display result The variable display of the first identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) based on the fact that the special display result has been derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 061IWS1129A and S1130A when N at Step 061IWS1128A, and displays and stops a loss symbol (for example, (1) The variable display of the special symbol may be forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means D3) In the means D2, the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, controls the state to the certain state after the end of the big hit game based on the big change big hit). ), It may be configured to control to the non-specific state based on the derived display of the second specific display result (for example, not to control to the positive change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means D4) In the means D2 or the means D3, the specific state control means is based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed a specific area (for example, a V area 061IW104) while being controlled to an advantageous state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state (see FIG. 10-11 (1)). As described above, in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is long. As shown in 2), the jackpot gaming based on normal big hit, opening period of the V region closing plate 061IW101 very short.) May be configured so. According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means D5) In any one of the means D2 to D4, the variable display execution means is a variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the second specific display result when controlled to the specific state. During the execution of the variable display, the variable display of the first identification information is stopped by displaying the predetermined display result based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, Modification 4 In step, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 061IWS1129A and S1130A when Y is determined in steps 061IWS1131A and S1131B. See FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49), a non-specific state During the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the identification information, the control to stop the variable display of the first identification information by displaying the predetermined display result is not performed. The computer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) may not be shifted to steps 061IWS1129A and S1129B when N is determined in steps 061IWS1131A and S1131B, as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

(Means D6) In any one of the means D1 to the means D5, the special condition is satisfied based on a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) to be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to execute steps 061IWS2213 to S2217 and S2225 to S2229 when Y is determined in steps 061IWS2211 and S2222. According to such a configuration, by ending the specific state based on the fact that the number of times of controlling to the advantageous state becomes the predetermined number, it is possible to improve the interest when the control to the specific state is possible.

(Means D7) In means D6, effect executing means capable of changing the effect mode in accordance with the remaining number of times that the number of times controlled to the advantageous state is the predetermined number (for example, executing steps 061IWS662 to S664 in the effect control CPU 120) May be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the remaining number of times until the number of times controlled to the advantageous state reaches the predetermined number.

  Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 06IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 21TM to configure a gaming machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed is applied to the characteristic portion 061IW, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol. At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the missing symbol. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability change state is forcibly terminated when the maximum hit number limiter is hit during the probability change state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10 General winning opening 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning prize ball device 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23… First count switch 24… Second count switch 30… Hitting operation handle 31A… Stick controller 31B… Push button 32… Movable body 41… Pass gate 100… Game control microcomputers 101, 121… ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124: random number circuit 105, 125: I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information in parallel;
When the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Special state control means which can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state when the special display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result,
When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed,
The variable display execution means,
While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being variably displayed and corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is variably displayed in the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed,
While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being variably displayed and corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is variably displayed in the other identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result based on the derived display of the identification information.

Images